6MD63 Us

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC Functions 2
Input /Output Unit
Installation and Commissioning 3
with Local Control Technical Data 4
6MD63
V4.4 Appendix A
Index
Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Liability Statement Copyright
We have checked the text of this manual against the Copyright Siemens AG 2002. All rights reserved.
hardware and software described. Exclusions and de- Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evalu-
viations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for ation and communication of its contents, is not authorized
lack of total agreement. except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for
The information in this manual is checked periodically, damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes
and necessary corrections will be included in future of patent application or trademark registration.
editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements.
Registered trademarks
We reserve the right to make technical improvements SIPROTEC, SIMATIC, SIMATIC NET , SINAUT , SI-
without notice. CAM, and DIGSI are registered trademarks of Siemens
AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks
Release 4.40.02
that if used by third parties for their own purposes may vi-
olate the rights of the owner.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1840-C1013

Preface
Purpose of This This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service
Manual of the device. In particular, one will find:
Descriptions of device functions and settings Chapter 2;
Instructions for mounting and commissioning Chapter 3;
Compilation of technical specifications Chapter 4;
As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the
Appendix.
General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC devic-
es are laid down in the SIPROTEC 4 system manual, order no. E50417H1176
C151.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjust-
ment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control
facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of This manual is valid for: SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 Input /Output Unit with Local Controls;
This Manual firmware version 4.4.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equip-
ment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Ar-
ticle 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081
and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 602556 for the low-volt-
age directive.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303).
ANSI This product has been designed according to ANSI C37.90.* standards.
6MD63 Manual i
C53000-G1840-C1013
Preface
This product is ULcertified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:
IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ.

TYPE 1 TYPE 1
76CA 76CA
Additional Support Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to
the local Siemens representative.
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may
be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
Instructions and The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an
Warnings appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following terms are used:
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all
warnings and hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
ii 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Preface
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and
the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with es-
tablished safety practices.
Is trained in rendering first aid.
Typographic and The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the
Symbol Conven- device appear in the text flow:
tions
Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which
may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal
computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are marked in bold letters of a mono-
space type style.
Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear
word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer
(with operation software DIGSI 4), are written in italic style, additionally.
Annunciations, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay
or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace
type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault device-internal logical input signal
Earth fault device-internal logical output signal
UL1L2 internal input signal of an analogue quantity

FNo 567
>Release external binary input signal with function number Fno
FNo 5432
Dev. Trip external binary output signal with function number Fno
Parameter address
Parameter name
1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the

On
address 1234 and the possible settings On and Off
Off
Parameter options
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 6061712 and
IEC 6061713 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
6MD63 Manual iii

C53000-G1840-C1013
Preface
Input signal of an analogue quantity
or OR gate
& AND gate
signal inversion
ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one

=1
of the inputs is active
Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are

=
active or inactive at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered)

above with positive, below with negative edge
Formation of one analogue output signal from

a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)
2610 Iph>>
Iph> Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
2611 T Iph>>
T 0
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable)
with setting address and parameter designator (name)
0 T
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
T Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
S Q Static memory (RSflipflop) with setting input (S),

R Q resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or
similar are used in most cases.
iv 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Table of Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.3 Characteristics........................................................................................................................ 7
2 Functions.............................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1 General................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1.1 Configuration of Functions.................................................................................................... 13
2.1.2 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 14
2.1.2.1 Power System ...................................................................................................................... 15
2.1.2.2 Current Transformers (CTs) ................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2.3 Voltage Transformers (VTs) ................................................................................................ 16
2.1.2.4 Information .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.3 Power System Data 2........................................................................................................... 18
2.1.3.1 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 18
2.1.3.2 Information ........................................................................................................................... 18
2.2 Monitoring Functions ............................................................................................................ 19

2.2.1 Description of Measured Values Monitoring......................................................................... 19
2.2.1.1 Hardware Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 19
2.2.1.2 Software Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 20
2.2.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits ............................................................ 21
2.2.2 Programming Settings for Measured Values Monitoring ...................................................... 23
2.2.2.1 General................................................................................................................................. 23
2.2.2.2 Measured Values Monitoring................................................................................................ 23
2.2.2.3 Settings for Measured Values Monitoring............................................................................. 23
2.2.2.4 Information List for Measured Values Monitorin ................................................................... 24
2.2.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions............................................................ 25
2.2.4 Group Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 26
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes ................................................................................ 27

2.3.1 Functional Description .......................................................................................................... 27
2.3.2 Configuration Notes.............................................................................................................. 28
2.3.2.1 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 30
2.3.2.2 List of Information ................................................................................................................. 34
6MD63 Manual v
C53000-G1840-C1013
2.4 Phase Rotation ..................................................................................................................... 36
2.4.1 Description of Phase Rotation .............................................................................................. 36
2.4.2 Programming Settings .......................................................................................................... 36
2.5 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................... 37

2.5.1 Types of Commands ............................................................................................................ 38
2.5.2 Steps in the Command Sequence........................................................................................ 38
2.5.3 Interlocking ........................................................................................................................... 40
2.5.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ................................................................................. 40
2.5.4 Recording and acknowledgement of commands.................................................................. 47
2.6 Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................... 49

2.6.1 Message Processing ............................................................................................................ 49
2.6.1.1 Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 50
2.6.2 Measurements...................................................................................................................... 50
2.6.3 Commissioning Aids ............................................................................................................. 53
2.6.3.1 Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation ........................................... 53
2.6.3.2 Testing System Ports ........................................................................................................... 53
2.6.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................. 54
2.6.4 Programming Settings .......................................................................................................... 54
2.6.4.1 Settings for Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................ 55
2.6.4.2 Information List for Auxiliary Functions................................................................................. 56
3 Installation and Commissioning ...................................................................................................... 61
3.1 Installation and Connections ................................................................................................ 62

3.1.1 Installation ............................................................................................................................ 62
3.1.2 Connections ......................................................................................................................... 68
3.1.3 Hardware Modifications ........................................................................................................ 68
3.1.3.1 General................................................................................................................................. 68
3.1.3.2 Disassembly of the Device ................................................................................................... 70
3.1.3.3 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards ............................................................... 74
3.1.3.4 Interface Modules ................................................................................................................. 82
3.1.3.5 Reassembly of Device.......................................................................................................... 86
3.2 Checking Connections.......................................................................................................... 87

3.2.1 Data Connections ................................................................................................................. 87
3.2.2 Checking Power Plant Connections ..................................................................................... 90
6MD63 Manual vi
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.3 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................... 92
3.3.1 Testing mode and transmission blocking ............................................................................. 93
3.3.2 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface............................................................................. 93
3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................. 95
3.3.4 Testing User-Defined Functions ........................................................................................... 97
3.3.5 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing ..................................................................... 97
3.3.6 Directional Checks with Load Current .................................................................................. 98
3.3.7 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-box ....................................................... 99
3.3.8 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices ..................................................... 101
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 102
4 Technical Data ................................................................................................................................. 103
4.1 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 104

4.1.1 Analog Inputs ..................................................................................................................... 104
4.1.2 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... 104
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................. 105
4.1.4 Communications Interfaces ................................................................................................ 107
4.1.5 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 110
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests .................................................................................................... 112
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.......................................................................................................... 112
4.1.8 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................. 113
4.1.9 Certifications....................................................................................................................... 114
4.1.10 Construction ....................................................................................................................... 114
4.2 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 115
4.3 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection ............................................................................. 115
4.4 User Defined Functions with CFC ...................................................................................... 116
4.5 Additional Functions ........................................................................................................... 119
4.6 Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 123
A Appendix .......................................................................................................................................... 131
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories ............................................................................... 132

A.1.1 Ordering Information 6MD63 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher).............................. 132
A.1.2 Ordering Information 6MD63 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD)....................................... 134
A.1.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 136
6MD63 Manual vii

C53000-G1840-C1013
A.2 Elementary Diagrams ......................................................................................................... 139
A.2.1 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation..................................................... 139
A.2.2 Housing for panel surface mounting................................................................................... 146
A.2.3 Devices With Detached Operation Unit .............................................................................. 157
A.2.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operation Unit............................................... 164
A.3 Connection Examples......................................................................................................... 171

A.3.1 Current and Voltage Transformer Connection Examples................................................... 171
A.3.2 Connection Examples for RTD-box .................................................................................... 178
A.4 Default Settings .................................................................................................................. 179

A.4.1 LED Displays ...................................................................................................................... 179
A.4.2 Binary Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 179
A.4.3 Binary Outputs.................................................................................................................... 180
A.4.4 Function Keys..................................................................................................................... 181
A.4.5 Pre-Defined CFC Charts .................................................................................................... 183
A.5 Interoperability List ............................................................................................................. 187
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions............................................................................................. 189
A.7 Functions Overview ............................................................................................................ 190
A.8 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 190
A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information..................................... 198
A.10 Information List ................................................................................................................... 203
A.11 Measured Values ............................................................................................................... 212
Index ........................................................................................................................................... 217
6MD63 Manual viii

C53000-G1840-C1013
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 devices are introduced in this section. An overview of the
devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 1-2

1.2 Applications 1-5
1.3 Characteristics 1-7
6MD63 Manual 1
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 is a numerical Input /Output Unit with Local Control
equipped with a powerful microprocessor. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the
measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other primary pow-
er system equipment, are processed in a completely digital way. Figure 1-1 illustrates
the basic structure of the 6MD63.
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (MI) section consists of current and voltage transformers. They
convert the signals from the measuring transducers to levels appropriate for the inter-
nal processing of the 6MD63.
Four current inputs are available in the MI section. Three inputs are used for measur-
ing of the phase currents. The fourth input can be used for measuring the ground cur-
rent as the residual of the phase current transformers (In), or for measuring the ground
current from a separate current transformer.
MI IA AD C AV
Ia ERROR
A
RUN
Ib
Status
Ic
Output
In Relays, User-
Programmable
Va
LEDs
on the Front
Vb Panel, User-
C Programmable
Vc / 3V0 D Display on
the Front Panel
7 8 9
Front To
Operator 4 5 6
Control Panel PC Port PC
1 2 3
. 0 +/- System To
Serial Interface SCADA
CTRL ESC ENTER
Rear PC/Modem/
Binary Inputs, Service Port
Programmable
RTD-box
Time DCF 77/

Uaux. Power Supply Synchronization IRIG B
Figure 1-1 Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 6MD63 (Maximum Configuration)
2 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Overall Operation
The 6MD63 has three voltage inputs in the MI section. The inputs can either be used
to measure the three phase-ground voltages, or two phase-phase voltages and 3V0
from, for example, open delta voltage transformers. Displacement voltage is another
term used for 3V0. It is also possible to connect two phase-to-phase voltages in open-
delta connection.
The analog input quantities from the MI stage are passed on to the input amplification
(IA) stage, which provides high-resistance terminations for the analog quantities. The
IA stage consists of filters for processing the measured values. The filters are opti-
mized with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
The analog-to-digital (AD) stage consists of memory components, a multiplexer, and
an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter. The A/D converter processes the analog signals
from the IA stage. The digital signals from the converter are input to the microcomputer
system where they are processed as numerical values in the residing algorithms.
Microcomputer The actual protection and control functions of the 6MD63 are processed in the micro-
System computer system (C). In addition, the C controls the measured quantities. Specifi-
cally, the C performs:
Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
Control of signals for the logic functions
Decision for trip, close, and other control commands
Output of control commands for switching devices (output contacts)
Recording of messages and data for events, alarms and control actions, and provi-
sion of their data for analysis
Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data re-
cording, real-time clock, communications, interfaces, etc.
Binary Inputs and The C obtains external information through the binary inputs such as blocking com-
Outputs mands for protective elements or position indications of circuit breakers. The C is-
sues commands to external equipment via the output contacts. These output com-
mands are generally used to operate circuit breakers or other switching devices. They
can also be connected to other protective devices, annunciators, or external carrier
equipment for use in Pilot-Relaying schemes.
Front Elements Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide
information such as messages related to events and functional status of the 6MD63.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local inter-
action with the 6MD63. All information of the device can be accessed using the inte-
grated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control set-
tings, operating and fault messages, and metering values (see also Chapter 2). The
settings can be modified; the procedures are discussed in Chapter 2. In addition, con-
trol of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 6MD63 front panel.
Serial Interfaces A serial PC Port on device is provided for local communications with the 6MD63
through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of the device is
6MD63 Manual 3
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Introduction
possible. The operating program DIGSI 4 is required which facilitates a comfortable

handling of all device functions.
A separate Service Port can be provided for remote communications via a modem,
or substation computer. The operating program DIGSI 4 is required. This port is es-
pecially well suited for the fixed wiring of the devices to the PC or operation via a mo-
dem. The service port can also be used to connect a RTD-box for entering external
temperatures.
All 6MD63 data can be transferred to a central control and monitor system (RTU/SCA-
DA) through the Scada Port. Various protocols and physical interfaces are available
to suit the particular application.
A further port is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external
synchronization sources.
Further communications protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.
Power Supply The 6MD63 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages from 24
VDC to 250 VDC. The device can also be supplied with 115/230 VAC. Momentary dips
of the supply voltage up to 50 ms are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Sub-
section 4.1). Voltage dips can occur, for example, if the voltage supply system (sub-
station battery) becomes short-circuited or experiences a severe variation in load.
4 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Applications
1.2 Applications
The Input /Output Unit with Local Control SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 is a versatile device
designed for many applications. The 6MD63 can be used as a control, and monitoring
device for distribution feeders and transmission lines of any voltage in networks that
are grounded, low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated neutral
point structure.
The 6MD63 includes the functions that are necessary for monitoring of circuit breaker
positions, and control of the circuit breakers in straight bus applications or breaker-
and-a-half configurations; therefore, the device can be universally employed.
Control Functions The 6MD63 supports all control and monitoring functions that are required for operat-
ing medium to high-voltage substations. A major application is the reliable control of
switchgear or circuit breakers. Such control can be accomplished via the integrated
operator panel, the system interface, the binary inputs, and the serial port using a per-
sonal computer with DIGSI 4.
The status of the primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be transmitted to the
6MD63 via auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. The present status (or posi-
tion) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the 6MD63, and used for interlock-
ing or, if applicable, plausibility monitoring. Only the quantity of binary inputs and out-
puts available in the 6MD63 limits the number of primary devices that can be operated.
Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input (single indica-
tion) or two binary inputs (double indication) can be used in the position monitoring
process.
The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associat-
ed with switching authority Local, DIGSI 4 PC, or Remote, and by the operating
mode Interlocked or Non-Interlocked, with password request. Processing of inter-
locking conditions for switching (e.g. switching error protection) can be established
with the aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions.
Messages and A series of operating messages provide information about conditions in the power sys-
Measured Values; tem and the 6MD63. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be
Recording of Event displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
Data
Messages of the 6MD63 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the
front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and commu-
nicated via the serial interfaces (see Communication below).
Important events and changes in conditions are saved under Annunciation in the
Event Log.
Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with PCs, RTUs, and SCADA sys-
tems.
A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local commu-
nications with a personal computer. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via
this port. Using the DIGSI 4 software, settings and configuration can be made to the
relay, Realtime operating quantities can be viewed, Event Log records can be dis-
played, and controls can be issued.
6MD63 Manual 5
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Introduction
A DIGSI 4 service interface port, a system (SCADA) port and a time-sync port (IRIG-
B or DCF77) are optionally available on the rear of the device.
A rear service interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fiber optics
type ST. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port.
A rear system interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fiber optics
type ST for communications between the 6MD63 and a PCs, RTUs, or SCADA sys-
tems Standard Protocols, IEC 608705103 are available via the system port. Inte-
gration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT LSA and SICAM also
take place with this profile.
Alternatively, a field bus coupling with PROFIBUS FMS is available for the 6MD63.
The PROFIBUS FMS is performed in accordance with IEC 61850, is an open commu-
nications standard that particularly has wide acceptance in process control and auto-
mation engineering, with especially high performance. A profile has been defined for
the PROFIBUS communication that covers all of the information types required for
protective and process control engineering. The integration of the devices into the en-
ergy automation system SICAM can also take place with this profile.
Besides the field-bus connection with PROFIBUS FMS, further couplings are possible
with PROFIBUS DP and the protocols DNP3.0 and MODBUS. These protocols do not
support all possibilities which are offered by PROFIBUS FMS.
6 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Characteristics
1.3 Characteristics
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.

Complete digital processing and control of measured values, from the sampling of
the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping or
closing circuit breakers or other switchgear devices.
Total electrical separation between the processing stages of the 6MD63 and the ex-
ternal transformer circuits, control circuits, and DC supply circuit because of the de-
sign of the binary inputs, outputs, and the DC converters.
Easy device operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a con-
nected personal computer running DIGSI 4.
Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the de-
vice.
Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-
term mean values.
Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-di-
agnostics covering the hardware and software.
Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces
through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibers.
Battery-buffered clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B (or DCF77) signal,
binary input signal, or system interface command;
Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals sent and
the accumulated, interrupted currents of each pole of the circuit breaker;
Tracking of operating hours (time when load is supplied) of the equipment;
Commissioning aids such as connection check, direction determination, status in-
dication of all binary inputs/outputs.
Monitoring Availability of the 6MD63 is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of the in-
Functions ternal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware, and software;
Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored us-
ing summation and symmetry check techniques;
Trip circuit monitoring;
Phase rotation.
Breaker Control Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the process control keys or the pro-
grammable function keys on the front panel, through the SCADA, or through the
front PC interface using a personal computer with DIGSI 4;
Circuit breakers are monitored via the breaker auxiliary contacts;
Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking con-
ditions.
RTD-Boxes Detection of any ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures by means of RTD-

boxes and external temperature sensors.
6MD63 Manual 7
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Introduction
Phase Rotation Selectable ABC or ACB with a setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
User-defined Internal and external signals can be logically combined to establish user-defined
Functions logic functions;
All common logic functions are available for programming (AND, OR,NOT, Exclu-
sive OR, etc.);
Time delays and limit value inquiries are available;
Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee charac-
teristic for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring.
n
8 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions 2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 6MD63
relay. The setting options for each function are defined, including instructions for re-
porting setting values and formulas where required.
2.1 General 11
2.2 Monitoring Functions 19
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes 27
2.4 Phase Rotation 36
2.5 Breaker Control 37
2.6 Auxiliary Functions 49
6MD63 Manual 9
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Regionalization The SIPROTEC 6MD63 devices are offered in regional versions. The prepared func-
tions are adapted to the technical requirements of the regions. The user should pur-
chase only the functional scope that is needed.
Table 2-1 Regionalization
Function Region DE Region Worldwide Region US

Germany Worldwide USA
Language German English American English
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz / 60 Hz 60 Hz
Default 50 Hz
Control Buttons on Front Red, Green Red, Green Control Gray Colored
Panel (7SJ63, 7SJ64) Control Buttons Buttons Control Buttons
10 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
General
2.1 General
The settings associated with the various device functions may be modified using the
controls on the front panel of the device or by using the operator interface in DIGSI 4
in conjunction with a personal computer. The SIPROTEC 4System Manual gives a
detailed description of the procedure. Therefore, it will only be described briefly here.
Password No. 5 is required to modify individual settings.
:
From PC with To select a function, the user should double-click on Settings, and then double-click
DIGSI 4 on the desired setting function (e.g. Power System Data 1 is selected by double-
clicking Settings, and then double-clicking Power System Data 1 as illustrated
in Figure 2-1).
Figure 2-1 Navigating Using DIGSI 4 Example
A dialog box associated with the selected function is displayed (e.g., if Power Sys-
tem Data 1 function is selected, the dialog box shown in Figure 2-2 will appear). If
a function contains many settings, the dialog box may include multiple windows. In this
situation, the user can select individual windows via tabs located at the top of the dia-
log box (e.g., In Figure 2-2, tabs exist for Power System, CTs, VTs, and Break-
er).
6MD63 Manual 11
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Figure 2-2 Power System Data Dialog Box in DIGSI 4 Example
The left column of the dialog box (identified as the No. column) contains the four-digit
address number of the setting. The middle column of the dialog box (identified as the
Settings column) contains the title of the setting, and the right column of the dialog
box (identified as the Value column) contains the current value of the setting in text
or numerical format. When the mouse cursor is positioned over a numerical field in the
Value column, the allowable range is shown.
To modify a setting, the user must click on the setting value which is displayed in the
Value column.
Text Values When a text setting value is selected, a pull-down menu of possible setting options is
displayed. To modify the setting, the user simply clicks on the desired option. The pull-
down menu closes, and the new setting value appears in the Value column.
Numerical Values When a numerical setting value is selected, the setting is modified using the number
(including ) keys, if applicable, with a decimal comma (not a decimal point). A value of infinity
may be entered by pressing the small o key twice. The setting modification is con-
firmed by clicking on Apply, or the user may select another setting to modify.
If the value entered is outside the allowable range, a message block appears on the
screen describing the error and displaying the acceptable range of values. To ac-
knowledge the message, the user should click OK, and the original value reappears.
A new entry can be made or another setting value can be modified.
Primary or Setting values can be entered and displayed in primary terms or secondary terms, as
Secondary Values desired. DIGSI 4 automatically performs the conversions. For this, the station data
have to be entered correctly.
12 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
General
To switch between primary values and secondary values:

G Click on Options in the menu bar, as shown in Figure 2-3.
G Click on the desired alternative.
Figure 2-3 Selection of Primary or Secondary Value Entry Example
Additional Settings Those settings that are modified only in special cases are typically hidden. They may
be made visible by checking on Display Additional Settings.
2.1.1 Configuration of Functions
General The 6MD63 relay contains selectable protection functions. The first step in configuring
the relay is to determine which functions are required.
The available functions must be configured as enabled or disabled. For individual
functions, the choice between several alternatives may be presented, as described
below.
Functions configured as disabled are not processed by the 6MD63. There are no
messages, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed dur-
ing detailed settings.
Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the re-
lay (see table 2-1 and ordering code in the appendix for details).
6MD63 Manual 13
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Determination of Configuration settings must be entered using a PC and the software program
Functional Scope DIGSI 4 and transferred via the front serial port, or via the DIGSI 4 serial port inter-
face. Operation via DIGSI 4 is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual.
Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration
settings (see Section 4). Without the password, the settings may be read, but may not
be modified and transmitted to the device.
The functional scope with the available alternatives is set in the Device Configu-
ration dialog box to match equipment requirements.
If you want to detect an ambient temperature or a coolant temperature, specify in ad-
dress 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT the port to which the RTD-box is connected. For 6MD63
Port C (service port) is used for this purpose. The number and transmission type of
the temperature detectors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) can be specified
in address 0191 RTD CONNECTION: 6 RTD simplex or 6 RTD HDX (with one RTD-
box) or 12 RTD HDX (with two RTD-boxes). Appendix A.3.2 gives design examples.
The settings in address 0191 has to comply with those at the RTD-box (see Subsec-
tion 2.3.2).
Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments

190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input
Port C
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
6 RTD half duplex operation operation tion Type
12 RTD half duplex opera-
tion
2.1.2 Power System Data 1
The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the
device will be compatible with its desired application. Phase sequence data, nominal
system frequency data, CT&PT ratios and their physical connections, as well as,
breaker operating times and minimum current thresholds are selected in the Power
System Data 1 display.
To modify these settings from the front of the device, the user should press the MENU key
and wait for the MAIN MENU to appear. From the MAIN MENU, the user should use the
key to select Settings, and then use the key to navigate to the SETTINGS
display. To obtain the P.System Data1 display, the user should use the key to
select P.System Data1 in the SETTINGS display, and then press the ENTER key.
To modify settings associated with Power System Data 1 using DIGSI 4, the user
should double-click Settings, and then Power System Data 1, and the desired
selection options will be displayed. A dialog box opens under Power System Data
1 which contains the tabs Power System, CTs and VTs. In these tabs individual
settings are configured. Thus the following Subsections are structured accordingly.
14 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
General
2.1.2.1 Power System
Nominal Frequency Address 0214 Rated Frequency corresponds to the frequency at which the pro-
tected equipment operate. The setting is dependent on the model number of the relay
purchased, and must be in accordance with the nominal frequency of the power sys-
tem.
Phase Sequence Address 0209 PHASE SEQ. is used to establish phase rotation. The default phase
sequence is A B C. For systems that use a phase sequence of A C B, address
0209 should be set accordingly. A temporary reversal of rotation is also possible using
binary inputs (see Section 2.4).
Temperature Unit Address 0276 TEMP. UNIT allows you to display the temperature values either in de-
gree Celsius or in degree Fahrenheit.
Polarity of Current At address 0201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current trans-
Transformers formers is specified (see Figure 2-4 for options). Modifying this setting also results in
a polarity reversal of the ground current inputs IN or INS.
Busbar
IA IG
IB
IC
IA
IG IB
IC
Line Line
Address 0201 = Address 0201=
towards Line towards Busbar
Figure 2-4 Current Transformer Polarity
Voltage Connection Address 0213 VT Connection specifies how the voltage transformers are connect-
ed. When the voltage transformers are connected in a wye configuration, address
0213 is set at Van, Vbn, Vcn. VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd meaning that
two phase-to-phase voltages (V-connection) and Vgnd are connected. The latter set-
ting is also selected when only two phase-to-phase voltage transformers are utilized
or when only the displaced voltage (zero sequence voltage) is connected to the de-
vice.
2.1.2.2 Current Transformers (CTs)
CTs Nominal Val- At addresses 0204 CT PRIMARY and 0205 CT SECONDARY, information is entered
ues regarding the primary and secondary ampere ratings of the current transformers. It is
important to note that the primary ampere rating of the current transformers is based
on the actual tapped connection of the current transformers secondary winding (i.e.
for a 1200/5 ampere multi-ratio current transformer connected at a 600/5 ampere tap,
6MD63 Manual 15
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
the user should enter a value of 600 for CT PRIMARY and a value of 5 for CT SEC-
ONDARY). It is also important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current
transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will incor-
rectly calculate primary amperes.
Addresses 0217 Ignd-CT PRIM and 0218 Ignd-CT SEC provide the device with
information on the primary and secondary rated current of the ground CT. In case of
a normal connection (starpoint current connected to Ignd-transformer) 0217 Ignd-CT
PRIM and 0204 CT PRIMARY must be set to the same value.
2.1.2.3 Voltage Transformers (VTs)
VTs Nominal Val- At addresses 0202 Vnom PRIMARY and 0203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is en-
ues tered regarding the rated primary nominal voltage and rated secondary nominal volt-
ages (L-L) of the connected voltage transformers.
VTs Ratio Address 0206A Vph / Vdelta corresponds to the factor by which the secondary
phase-to-ground voltage must be adjusted relative to the secondary displacement
voltage (zero sequence voltage), and only applies in situations where the displace-
ment voltage is actually measured by the device as opposed to calculated by the de-
vice.
If the voltage transformer set provides open delta windings and if these windings are
connected to the device, this must be specified accordingly in address 0213 (see
above margin heading Voltage Connection). The relationships between the second-
ary device input voltages and the primary phase-to-ground and displacement voltages
are given as follows:
For the secondary input voltages representing phase-to-phase voltages:
Vprim- Vprim-g
Vsec-input = ------------------------ = 3 ------------------------
VT Ratio VT Ratio
For the secondary input voltage representing displacement voltage:
Vprim-disp
Vsec-input = 3 ----------------------------
VT Ratio
Since the per unit base values of the phase-to-ground voltage and the displacement
voltage are equivalent, Vsec-input / Vprim-g should equal Vsec-input / Vprim-disp.
To compensate for the voltage transformer connection, the device must adjust the
secondary phase-to-ground voltage upward by a factor of 3. Therefore, in this case,
address 0206A Vph / Vdelta would be set at 1.73 (= 3).
For situations where displacement voltage is measured by the device and other types
of voltage transformer connections are utilized, the setting at address 0206A should
be modified accordingly.
16 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
General

214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
209 PHASE SEQ. ABC ABC Phase Sequence

ACB
276 TEMP. UNIT Degree Celsius Degree Celsius Unit of temparature measure-
Degree Fahrenheit ment
201 CT Starpoint towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint

towards Busbar
213 VT Connection Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection

Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn, VSyn
204 CT PRIMARY 10..50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current
205 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current

5A
217 Ignd-CT PRIM 1..50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary current
218 Ignd-CT SEC 1A 1A Ignd-CT rated secondary current

5A
202 Vnom PRIMARY 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECON- 100..225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)

DARY
206A Vph / Vdelta 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To

Open-Delta-VT
210A TMin TRIP CMD 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command Dura-
tion
211A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01..32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Current

Threshold
2.1.2.4 Information
F.No. Alarm Comments

05145 >Reverse Rot. >Reverse Phase Rotation
05147 Rotation ABC Phase rotation ABC
05148 Rotation ACB Phase rotation ACB
6MD63 Manual 17
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
2.1.3 Power System Data 2
Definition of At addresses 1101 FullScaleVolt. and 1102 FullScaleCurr., the reference

Nominal Rated voltage (phase-to-phase) and reference current (phase) of the protected equipment is
Values entered (e.g., motors). These values do not effect pickup settings. If these reference
values match the primary VTs and CTs, they correspond to the settings in address
0202 and 0204 (Subsection 2.1.2). They are generally used to show values in refer-
ence to full scale. For example, if a CT ratio of 600/5 is selected and the full load cur-
rent of a motor is 550 amps, a value of 550 amps should be entered for
FullScaleCurr. if monitoring in reference to full load current is desired. 550 amps
are now displayed as 100 % in the percentage metering display.
2.1.3.1 Settings
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values are for a device with a
nominal current rating IN = 1 A. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting
the device with primary values.

1101 FullScaleVolt. 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScaleVol-
tage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. 10..50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-

rent(Equipm.rating)
2.1.3.2 Information

04601 >52-a >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
04602 >52-b >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
18 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Monitoring Functions
2.2 Monitoring Functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and
software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibil-
ity, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely inte-
grated into the monitoring. It is also possible to implement trip and closing circuit mon-
itoring, using appropriate binary inputs as available.
2.2.1 Description of Measured Values Monitoring
2.2.1.1 Hardware Monitoring
The device is monitored from the measurement inputs to the binary outputs. Monitor-
ing checks the hardware for malfunctions and disallowed conditions.
Auxiliary and The processor voltage of 5 V DC is monitored, and if the voltage decreases below the
Reference Voltages minimum value, the device is removed from operation. When the normal voltage re-
turns, the processor system is restarted.
Removal of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and
a message is immediately generated by a dead contact. Brief voltage interruptions of
less than 50 ms do not disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary volt-
age 110 V DC).
The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the AD (analog-digital)
converter. The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable
range, and lengthy deviations are reported.
Buffer Battery The buffer battery, which ensures the operation of the internal clock and the storage
of counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for
charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage, then the Fail Battery
message is issued.
The internal battery of 7SJ64 is switched off automatically by the clock module when
the device has been disconnected from the auxiliary voltage for a period of 1 to 2 days
meaning that clock management will be discontinued. The memory containing the
messages and fault data is however preserved.
Memory The working memory (RAM) is tested when the system is started up. If a malfunction
Components occurs then, the starting sequence is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation,
the memory is checked using its checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
cross sum that is freshly generated each time the setting process takes place.
If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.
6MD63 Manual 19
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Probing Probing and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are con-
stantly monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization,
then the processor system is restarted.
Measurement Value Up to four input currents are measured by the device. Three of the currents corre-
Collection Cur- spond to phase currents and the fourth current corresponds to the neutral or ground
rents current measured from a separate current transformer. If all four currents inputs are
connected, their digitized sum must be zero.
Faults in the current circuit are recognized if
IF = |ia+ib+ic+(kNig) | > S I THRESHOLD IN + S I FACTOR Imax
The factor kN takes into account a possible difference in the neutral current transform-
er ratio (e.g. toroidal current transformer see addresses 0217, 0218, 0204 and
0205):
Ignd-CT PRIM Ignd-CT SEC

k N = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY
S I THRESHOLD and S I FACTOR are programmable settings. The component S

I FACTOR Imax takes into account the allowable error of the input transformer, which
can be especially large when high fault current levels are present (Figure 2-5). The
dropout ratio is about 97%.
This malfunction is reported as Failure S I.
IF
IN
Increase:
I FACTOR
I THRESHOLD
Imax
IN
Figure 2-5 Current Sum Monitoring
2.2.1.2 Software Monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the
hardware (hardware watchdog) that runs upon failure of the processor or an internal
program, and causes a complete restart of the processor system.
20 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of

programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart at-
tempt is begun. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 30 second window of time,
the device automatically removes itself from service and the red Error LED lights up.
The readiness relay opens and indicates device malfunction with its normal contact.
2.2.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits
Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current transformers or

voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for start-up!), are
detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically
checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present.
Current Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry
among the input currents is expected. This symmetry is checked by the device, using
a quantity monitor. The smallest phase current is compared to the largest phase cur-
rent, and asymmetry is recognized if:
|Imin|/|Imax| < BAL. FACTOR I, as long as Imax /IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
where Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin is the smallest. The sym-
metry factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase cur-
rents while the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range
of this monitoring (see Figure 2-6). Both settings are adjustable, and the dropout ratio
is about 97 %.
This malfunction is reported as Fail I balance.
Imin
IN
Increase:
BAL.FACTOR I
BALANCE I LIMIT
Imax
IN
Figure 2-6 current Symmetry Monitoring
Voltage Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry
among the input voltages is expected. Because the phase-to-phase voltages are in-
sensitive to ground connections, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for the sym-
metry monitoring. If the device is connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the
phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly, whereas if the device is connect-
ed to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage, then the third phase-to-
phase voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the small-
6MD63 Manual 21
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
est and largest phase-to-ground voltages are calculated and compared to check for
symmetry. Asymmetry is recognized if:
|Vmin|/|Vmax| < BAL. FACTOR V, as long as |Vmax| > BALANCE V-LIMIT
where Vmax is the largest of the three phase-to-ground voltages and Vmin is the small-
est. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V is the measure for the asymmetry of the
conductor voltages; the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT is the lower limit of the oper-
ating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-7). Both settings are adjustable. The drop-
out ratio is about 97 %.
This malfunction is reported as Fail V balance.
vmin
V
Increase:
BAL.FACTOR V
BALANCE VLIMIT
Vmax
V
Figure 2-7 Voltage Symmetry Monitoring
Current and Volt- To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the
age Rotation phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents
are checked by the monitoring.
Direction measurement with normal voltages, path selection for fault location, and
negative sequence detection all assume a phase sequence of abc. The phase se-
quence of the phase-to-ground voltages is verified by ensuring the following
Va leads Vb leads Vc leads Va
Likewise, the phase sequence of the phase currents is verified by ensuring the follow-
ing
Ia leads Ib leads Ic leads Ia
Verification of the voltage rotation occurs when each measured voltage is at least
| Vc |, |Vb |, | Va| > 40V / 3.
Verification of the current rotation occurs when each measured current is at least
|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic| > 0.5 IN.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages Fail Ph. Seq. V or Fail Ph.
Seq. I are issued, along with the switching of this message Fail Ph. Seq..
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective re-
lay should be adjusted via a binary input or a programmable setting. If the phase se-
quence is changed in the relay, phases b and c internal to the relay are reversed,
and the positive and negative sequence currents are thereby exchanged (see also
22 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Section 2.4). The phase- related messages, malfunction values, and measured values
are not affected by this.
2.2.2 Programming Settings for Measured Values Monitoring
2.2.2.1 General
Measured value monitoring can be turned ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SU-
PERV.
2.2.2.2 Measured Values Monitoring
The sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified. Default values are set at
the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially high operating asymmetry
in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the application, or if it becomes
apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically, then
the setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (Phase-to-Phase),
above which the voltage symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 2-7). Address
8103 BAL. FACTOR V is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the
symmetry characteristic curve (Figure 2-7).
Address 8104 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit current, above which the cur-
rent symmetry monitor is effective (see also Figure 2-6). Address 8105 BAL. FACTOR
I is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the slope of the symmetry characteristic
curve (Figure 2-6).
Address 8106 S I THRESHOLD determines the limit current, above which the current
sum monitor (see Figure 2-5) is activated (absolute portion, only relative to IN). The
relative portion (relative to the maximum conductor current) for activating the current
sum monitor (Figure 2-5) is set at address 8107 S I FACTOR.
Note:
Current sum monitoring is only in effect if the ground current for the line to be protect-
ed is connected.
Note:
The connections of the ground paths and their adaption factors were set when config-
uring the general station data. These settings must be correct for the measured values
monitoring to function properly.
2.2.2.3 Settings for Measured Values Monitoring
In the list below, the setting ranges and default setting values for current-based set-
tings are for a device with a nominal current rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rat-
6MD63 Manual 23
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
ing IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting values by 5. Con-
sider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.

8101 MEASURE. OFF ON Measurement Supervision
SUPERV ON
5301 FUSE FAIL MON. ON OFF Fuse Fail Monitor

OFF
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance

Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage

Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for Balance

Monitoring
8105 BAL. FACTOR I 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Moni-
tor
8106 I THRESHOLD 0.05..2.00 A; 0.10 A Summated Current Monitoring

Threshold
8107 I FACTOR 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monitoring

Factor
2.2.2.4 Information List for Measured Values Monitorin

00162 Failure I Failure: Current Summation
00163 Fail I balance Failure: Current Balance
00167 Fail V balance Failure: Voltage Balance
00161 Fail I Superv. Failure: General Current Supervision
00171 Fail Ph. Seq. Failure: Phase Sequence
00176 Fail Ph. Seq. V Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
00175 Fail Ph. Seq. I Failure: Phase Sequence Current
00197 MeasSup OFF Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
06509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT >Failure: Feeder VT
06510 >FAIL: BUS VT >Failure: Busbar VT
24 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
2.2.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of

the processor system is initiated, or the device is taken out of service. after three un-
successful restart attempts. The live status contact operates to indicate the device is
malfunctioning. Also, the red LED ERROR lights up on the front cover, if the internal
auxiliary voltage is present, and the green RUN LED goes out. If the internal power
supply fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table 2-2 shows a summary of the monitoring
functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
.
Table 2-2 Summary of the Device Malfunction Responses
Monitoring Possible Cause Malfunction Re- Message Output

sponse
AC/DC Supply External (aux. Voltage) Device shutdown All LEDs dark Live status contact
Voltage Loss Internal (power supply) de-energized
Internal Supply Internal (power supply) Device shutdown LED ERROR Live status contact
Voltages Ribbon cable de-energized2)
disconnected
Battery Internal battery Annunciation Fail Battery

discharged (FNo. 00177)
Hardware Internal (processor Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR Live status contact
Watchdog failure) de-energized2)
Software Internal Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR Live status contact

Watchdog (program sequence) de-energized2)
ROM Internal (Hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR Live status contact
de-energized2)
RAM Internal (Hardware) Detection during LED blinks

boot sequence Live status contact
de-energized2)
Detection during LED ERROR
operation:
Restart attempt 1)
Settings Internal (Hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR Live status contact
de-energized2)
Analogue data Internal (Hardware) Device shutdown LED ERROR Live status contact
acquisition de-energized2)
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service.
2
) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.
6MD63 Manual 25
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Table 2-2 Summary of the Device Malfunction Responses
Monitoring Possible Cause Malfunction Re- Message Output

sponse
Current CT Error) Message Failure S I as masked

Summation (FNo. 00162)
Current CT Error Message Fail I balance as masked

Symmetry (FNo. 00163)
Voltage VT Error Message Fail Ph. Seq. V as masked

Symmetry (FNo. 00167)
Voltage Phase External (connections or Message Fail V balance as masked

Sequence power system) (FNo. 00176)
Current Phase External (connections or Message Fail Ph. Seq. I as masked

Sequence power system) (FNo. 00175)
1
) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service.
2
) Protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be still accessible.
2.2.4 Group Alarms
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms.
Table 2-3 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.
Table 2-3 Group alarms
Group alarm Composed of

FNo Designation FNo Designation
161 Fail I Superv. 0162 Failure S I
0163 Fail I balance
160 Alarm Sum Event 0162 Failure S I
0163 Fail I balance
0167 Fail V balance
0175 Fail Ph. Seq. I
0176 Fail Ph. Seq. V
0171 Fail Ph. Seq.
140 Error Sum Alarm 0178 I/O-BG gestrt
0183 .. 0189 Strung BG 1 .. 7
0144 Error 5V
0145 Error 0V
0146 Error -5V
0147 Error PwrSupply
0177 Fail Battery
26 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes
2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes
Up to two temperature detection units (RTD-boxes) with 12 measuring sensors in total

can be applied for temperature detection and are recognized by the device. In partic-
ular they enable the thermal status of motors, generators and transformers to be mon-
itored. Rotating machines are additionally monitored for a violation of the bearing tem-
perature thresolds. The temperatures are measured in different locations of the pro-
tected object by employing temperature sensors (RTD = Resistance Temperature De-
tector) and are transmitted to the device via one or two RTD-boxes 7XV566.
2.3.1 Functional Description
RTD-box 7XV56 The RTD-box 7XV566 is an external unit which is mounted on the top-hat rail. It fea-
tures 6 temperature detectors and one RS485 interface for communication with the
protection device. The RTD-box detects the coolant temperature of each measuring
point from the resistance value of the temperature detectors (Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120)
connected via a two- or three-wire lines and converts it to a digital value. The digital
values are held available at a serial port.
Communication The Input/Output unit 6MD63 can employ up to two RTD-boxes via its service port
with the Input/Out- (port C).
put Unit
A maximum of 12 temperature detectors is thus available. For greater distances to the
protection device the communication via fibre optic cables is recommend. Possible
communication structures are shown in Appendix A.3.2.
Processing The transmitted non-linearized temperature values are converted to a temperature in

Temperatures degree Celsius or Fahrenheit. The conversion depends on the temperature sensor
used.
For each temperature detector two thresholds decision can be performed which are
available for further processing. The user can make the corresponding allocations in
the configuration matrix.
An alarm is issued for each temperature sensor in the event of a short-circuit or inter-
ruption in the sensor circuit.
Figure 2-8 shows the logic diagram of the temperature processing.
The manual supplied with the RTD-box contains a connections diagram and dimen-
sioned drawing.
6MD63 Manual 27
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
9011A RTD 1 TYPE 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1
Non-linear- Temperature
ized values RTD 1 St.1 p.up
calculation
FNo. 14112
9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2
RTD 1 St.2 p.up

FNo. 14113
Moni-
toring Fail: RTD 1
FNo. 14111
1 Fail: RTD
FNo. 14101
Fail: RTD-Box 1
FNo. 00264
Figure 2-8 Logic diagram of the temperature processing for the RTD-box 1
2.3.2 Configuration Notes
General Temperature detection is only effective and accessible if this function was allocated to
an interface during configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1). At ad-
dress 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT the RTD-box(es) is allocated to the interface at which
it will be operated (e.g. port C). The number of sensor inputs and the communication
mode were set at address 0191 RTD CONNECTION. The temperature unit (C or F)
was set in the Power System Data 1 at address 0276 TEMP. UNIT.
Device Settings The settings are the same for each input and are here shown at the example of mea-
suring input 1.
Set the type of temperature detector for RTD1 (temperature sensor for measuring
point 1) at address 9011A RTD 1 TYPE. You can choose between Pt 100 W, Ni
120 W and Ni 100 W. If no temperature detector is available for RTD1, set RTD 1
TYPE = Not connected. This setting is only possible via DIGSI 4 at Additional
Settings.
28 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
The mounting location of RTD1 is set at address 9012A RTD 1 LOCATION. You can
choose between Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. This setting is only
possible via DIGSI 4 at Additional Settings.
Furthermore, you can set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depend-
ingn on the temperature unit selected in Power System Data (section below address
0276 TEMP. UNIT), you can enter the alarm temperature at address 9013 RTD 1
STAGE 1 in degree Celsius (C) or in degree Fahrenheit (F) at address 9014 RTD
1 STAGE 1. The tripping temperature is set at address 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 in
degree Celsius (C) or degree Fahrenheit (F) at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2.
The settings for the all other connected temperature detectors are made accordingly
(see Settings 2.3.2.1).
RTD-box If temperature detectors are used with two-wire connection, the line resistance (for
Settings short-circuited temperature detector) must be measured and adjusted. For this pur-
pose, select mode 6 in the RTD-box and enter the resistance value for the correspond-
ing temperature detector (range 0 to 50.6 ). If a 3-wire connection is used, no further
settings are required to this end.
A baudrate of 9600 bits/s ensures communication. Parity is even. The factory setting
of the bus number 0. Modifications at the RTD-box can be made in mode 7. The fol-
lowing convention applies:
Table 2-4 Setting the bus address at the RTD-box
Mode Number of RTD-boxes Address

simplex 1 0
half duplex 1 1
1st RTD-box: 1
half duplex 2
2nd RTD-box: 2
Further information is provided in the operating manual of the RTD-box.
Processing The RTD-box is visible in DIGSI 4 as part of the 6MD63 relays i.e., messages and
Measured Values measured values are displayed in the configuration matrix besides the internal func-
and Messages tions and like them they can be masked and processed. Messages and measured val-
ues can thus be forwarded to the integrated user-defined logic (CFC) and intercon-
nected as desired.
If it is desired that a message should appear in the event buffer, a cross must be en-
tered in the intersecting box of column/row.
6MD63 Manual 29
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
2.3.2.1 Settings

9011A RTD 1 TYPE not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION Oil Oil RTD 1: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -50..250 C; 100 C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -58..482 F; 212 F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE not connected not connected RTD 2: Type

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION Oil Other RTD 2: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
30 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
6MD63 Manual 31
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
32 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE not connected not connected RTD10: Type

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9102A RTD10 LOCATION Oil Other RTD10: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 -50..250 C; 100 C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 -58..482 F; 212 F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup
6MD63 Manual 33
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
2.3.2.2 List of Information
Note: Further alarms regarding thresholds of the individual temperature detectors are available at the RTD-box
for output via relay contacts.

00264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 Failure: RTD-Box 1
14101 Fail: RTD Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted)
14111 Fail: RTD 1 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted)
14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up
34 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3

00267 Fail: RTD-Box 2 Failure: RTD-Box 2
14201 Fail: RTD10 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted)
14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up
6MD63 Manual 35
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
2.4 Phase Rotation
2.4.1 Description of Phase Rotation
General Various functions of the 6MD63 only function correctly if the phase rotation of the volt-
ages and currents is known. Among these functions are negative sequence protec-
tion, undervoltage protection (based only on positive sequence voltages), directional
overcurrent protection, and measurement quantity monitors. A phase rotation is imple-
mented in the 6MD63 device using binary inputs and settings, thus making it possible
for all protective and monitoring functions to operate correctly when the phase rotation
is reversed.
If an acb phase rotationphase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting should be
entered at address 0209. (See Subsection 2.1.2).
If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must
be routinely changed), then a changeover signal at the input masked for this purpose
is sufficient to inform the protective relay of the phase rotation changeover.
Logic As stated before, the phase rotation is always established at address 0209 PHASE
SEQ.. The binary input (FNo. 05145, >Reverse Rot.) sets the phase rotation for
the opposite of the setting at 0209, via the exclusive-OR function (see Figure 2-9).
FNo. 05145
>Reverse Rot.. FNo. 05147
XOR Rotation ABC
0209 PHASE SEQ. FNo. 05148
Rotation ACB
1 A B C Opposite Phase Sequence
0 A C B
To The Monitoring Functions
Figure 2-9 Message Logic for the phase rotation Changeover
Influence on Moni- The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative se-
toring Functions quence quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one
phase-to-ground voltage from another. Therefore, this function is vital so that operat-
ing measurement values are not falsified. As stated before, this function influences
some of the monitoring functions (see Subsection 2.2.1.3) that issue messages if the
required and calculated phase rotations do not match.
2.4.2 Programming Settings
The normal phase sequence is set at 0209 PHASE SEQ. (see Subsection 2.1.2).
If, on the system side, phase rotation are made temporarily, then these are communi-
cated to the protective device using the binary input >Reverse Rot., FNo. 05145.
36 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Breaker Control
2.5 Breaker Control
General A Control command process is integrated in the SIPROTEC 6MD63 to coordinate the
operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control com-
mands can originate from four command sources:
Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
Local or remote operation using DIGSI 4
Remote operation using the SCADA Interface (via IEC, Profibus)
Automatic functions (e.g., using a binary input)
The device supports the operation of circuit breakers/switchgear. The number of
switchgear devices to be controlled is, basically, limited by the number of binary inputs
and outputs present. High security against inadvertent device operations can be en-
sured if interlocking checks are enabled. A standard set of optional interlocking checks
is provided for each command issued to circuit breakers/switchgear.
Devices with integrated or detached operator panel can control switchgear via the op-
erator panel of the device. Depending on the type of operator panel (text display or
graphic display) the procedure is slightly different:
Commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the relay.
For this purpose, there are three independent keys located below the graphic display.
Pressing the CTRL key causes the Control Display to appear in the LCD. The other two
control keys OPEN and CLOSE then become active, and control of switching devices be-
comes possible. The LCD must be changed back to the default display for other, non-
control, operational modes.
The navigation keys , , , are used to select the desired device in the Con-
trol Display. The CLOSE key or the OPEN key is then pressed to convey the intended con-
trol command. After pressing the appropriate key, the selected device in the Control
Display begins to blink in the targeted-position, and a message to confirm the control
command is given. The ENTER key is pressed to confirm. Next a security check takes
place. After the security check is complete, the ENTER key must be pressed again to car-
ry out the control command. If the ENTER key is not pressed within one minute, the se-
lection is cancelled. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the con-
trol command is issued.
After a successful switching operation, the Control Display shows the new position of
the device, and the message Control Executed is given at the bottom of the dis-
play. For control commands with feedback, the message Swgr. Feedback OK is
briefly displayed.
If the selected control command is not accepted, because an interlocking condition is
not met, then an error message appears in the display. The message indicates why
the command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC 4System Manual). This mes-
sage must be acknowledged with ENTER before any further control commands can be
issued.
Operation using The procedure for issuing control commands using the DIGSI 4 program is described
DIGSI 4 in the SIPROTEC 4System Manual (Control of Switchgear).
6MD63 Manual 37
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Operation using the Commands can be issued remotely via the SCADA interface as well. Please check
SCADA Interface MLFB order number to ensure that your individual relay has a SCADA interface mod-
ule that supports this. Please refer to specific protocol documents for a complete list
of supported commands (see SIPROTEC 4System Manual).
2.5.1 Types of Commands
Two (2) types of commands can be processed within the device:

Control commands
Internal / pseudo commands
Control Commands Control commands operate (OPEN/CLOSE) binary outputs. Examples are:
Commands (e.g. operation of circuit breakers, etc.)
Step Commands (e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs)
Set-point Commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils)
Internal / pseudo These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal
Commands functions, simulate changes of state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
Marking/Tagging commands are used to manually overwrite or set status functions
normally controlled by binary inputs.
Additionally, Tagging commands are issued to establish internal settings, such as
switching authority (remote vs. local), parameter set changeover, data transmission
block to the SCADA interface, and measured value set-points.
Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers.
Status Information commands:
Controlling activation of binary input status
Binary Output Blocking
2.5.2 Steps in the Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be
released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded.
Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each individual control command. Ad-
ditionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately for
each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards.
The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following:
Check Sequence Command Entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device)
Check Password Access Rights
Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) Selection of Deac-
tivated Interlocking Recognition
38 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Breaker Control
User configurable Interlocking checks that can be selected for each command
Switching Authority (local, remote)
Device Position (scheduled vs. actual comparison)
Zone Controlled/Field Interlocking/ (logic using CFC)
System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions)
Fixed Command Checks
Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing
the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay con-
tact. After 1 second the control action will be aborted).
Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands
are denied or delayed)
Equipment not Present at Output (If a circuit breaker or other operable equipment
is not configured to a binary output, then the command is denied)
Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker,
and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is
denied)
Component Hardware Malfunction
Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one
circuit breaker or switch)
1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as common ground,
whether a command has already been initiated for the affected output relay is
checked).
Monitoring the Interruption of a Command because of a Cancel Command

Command
Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
Execution
6MD63 Manual 39
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
2.5.3 Interlocking
The interlocking checks are divided into:

System Interlocking: checked by a central control system such as SCADA or sub-
station controller
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: checked in the device
System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control
system. Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a
central control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific com-
mands object properties box for the specific control device. Interlocking conditions can
be selected.
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other
switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is de-
termined by the configuration of the relay.
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking
(test mode) can be selected:
for Local commands, by activation of Normal/Test-key switch ,
for automatic commands, via command processing by CFC,
for local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via
Profibus.
2.5.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching
The command checks that can be selected for the 6MD63 relay are also referred to
as standard interlocking. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deactivated
(non interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not
checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked
within the command processing. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will
be rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. CO-), immediately followed
by an operation response information. Table 2-5 shows some types of commands and
messages. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event
logs, for DIGSI 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.
Table 2-5 types of command and messages

Type of command Abbrev. Message
Control issued CO CO+/
Manual tagging (positive / negative) MT MT+/
Input blocking IB IB+/ *)
Output blocking OB OB+/ *)
Control abortion CA CA+/
40 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Breaker Control
The plus appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: the
command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a neg-
ative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 2-10 shows the messages re-
lating to command execution and operation response information for a successful op-
eration of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and
tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual
entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.
EVENT LOG
---------------------
19.06.01 11:52:05,625
Q0 CO+ close
19.06.01 11:52:06,134
Q0 FB+ close
Figure 2-10 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0
Standard Interlock- The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each
ing Defaults controllable device. All of these are enabled as a default.
(fixed programming)
Device Status Check (scheduled = actual): the switching command is rejected, and
an error message is displayed, if the circuit breaker is already in the scheduled (de-
sired) position. (If this check is enabled, then it works whether interlocking, e.g.
zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both inter-
locked and non-interlocked status modes.
System Interlocking/Substation Controlled: To check the system interlocking, a lo-
cal command is transmitted to the central unit with Switch Authority = LOCAL. A
switching device that is subject to system interlocking cannot be switched by
DIGSI 4.
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking: All devices controlled by this relay can be inter-
locked by the CFC logic.
Blocked by protection: Not applicable for Input/Output Unit with Bay Controller
6MD63.
Double Operation Block: parallel switching operations are interlocked against one
another; while one command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
Switch Authority LOCAL: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected, a control command from the
user interface of the device is only allowed if the Key Switch (for devices without key
switch via configuration) is set to LOCAL.
Switch Authority DIGSI: Switching commands can be issued locally or remotely via
DIGSI. As part of the safety features, the device will check the DIGSI configuration
file in regard to the virtual device number to ensure that the correct configuration file
is used. DIGSI must have the same virtual device number. It is important that one
6MD63 Manual 41
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
file can not be reused with multiple relays. But it is possible to copy the file and use
the new file with another relay.
Switch Authority REMOTE: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected a control command from a re-
mote DIGSI connection or via the SCADA interface is only allowed if the Key Switch
(for devices without key switch via configuration) is set to REMOTE.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure
2-11.
.
Device with Source Switching Authority Switching Mode

of Command =
On/Off
LOCAL
& Local
1
SAS REMOTE ),
Local &
DIGSI
AUTO
&
Remote &
Switching Authority
(Local/Remote)
& DIGSI
Switching Authority DIGSI

DIGSI or
Remote
&
Switching Mode Non-Interlocked

Local
or SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n
&
Switching Mode
Remote
Interlocked
&
or
SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n
System Interlocking y/n Command
Field Interlocking y/n or Output
feedback Indication Protection Blocking y/n to Relay
On/Off Double Oper. Block y/n
SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n
Protection Blocking
Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n
52 Close
52 Open
Event
Condition
1)
Source REMOTE also includes SAS. Command using substation controller.
REMOTE Command using remote source such as SCADA through controller to device.
Figure 2-11 Standard Interlocking Arrangements
Figure 2-12 shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using DIGSI 4.
42 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Breaker Control
Not applicable
for 6MD63
Figure 2-12 DIGSI 4Dialogue box: Object properties for a command (configuration of the
interlocking conditions)
For devices with operator panel the display shows the configured interlocking reasons.
They are marked by letters explained in the following table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Interlocking commands
Interlocking commands Abbrev. Message

Control authorization L L
System interlock S S
Zone controlled Z Z
Target state = present state P P
(check switch position)
Block by protection B*) *)
*)not applicable for 6MD63
Figure 2-13 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of
the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in
table 2-6. All parametrized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 2-13).
6MD63 Manual 43
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Interlocking 01/03
--------------------
Q0 Close/Open S Z P B
Figure 2-13 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Control Logic using For Zone Controlled (field interlocking), control logic can be developed, using the
CFC CFC. Via specific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked
are available.
Switching Switching authority configures the relay to perform Local/Remote Supervisory func-
Authority (for tions. Note, that only one source can have authority at a time. The following switching
devices with authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence:
operator panel)
LOCAL (commands are issued from the relay keyboard)
DIGSI 4
REMOTE (commands are issued from SCADA)
The 6MD63 is equipped with key switches on the front panel. The top switch is re-
served for switching authority between Local and Remote mode. The switching au-
thority condition LOCAL allows commands from the user interface of the relay, but not
remote or DIGSI commands. The position Remote enables remote control.
The switching authority condition DIGSI allows commands to be initiated using
DIGSI 4. Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI 4 connection.
Configuration Programming:
1. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority LOCAL (check for
commands initiated Locally via keypad):
y/n
2. Specific Device (e.g., switching device): Switching authority REMOTE (check for
SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands:
y/n
44 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Breaker Control
In detail, the following interlocking logic is derived when using default configuration
settings:
Current Switching Switching Command issued Lo- Command issued from Command issued from
Authority Status Authority cally SAS or SCADA DIGSI
DIGSI
LOCAL Not checked Allowed Interlocked - switching Interlocked - DIGSI not
authority LOCAL
*2 checked
LOCAL checked Allowed Interlocked - switching Interlocked - switching

*2 *2
authority LOCAL authority LOCAL
REMOTE Not checked Interlocked - switching Allowed Interlocked - DIGSI not

authority REMOTE
*1 checked
REMOTE checked Interlocked - switching Interlocked -switching Allowed
*1 *2
authority DIGSI authority DIGSI
*1
) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not
marked.
*2
) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for: switch authority REMOTE (check for CLOSE, REMOTE, or
DIGSI status): is not marked
SC = source of command
SC = AUTO SICAM: Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in
the CFC) are not subject to switching authority and are therefore always allowed.
Switching The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to Remote. The specifi-
Authority (for cations of the previous section apply.
devices without
operator panel)
Switching Mode There are three modes:

(for devices with
Local
operator panel)
Remote
Auto
The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be acti-
vated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes are defined:

Local commands (SC = LOCAL)
interlocked, or
non-interlocked switching.
The 6MD63 is equipped with key switches on the front panel. The bottom switch is re-
served for switching mode. The Normal position allows interlocked switching while
the Interlocking OFF position allows non-interlocked switching.
Remote or DIGSI 4 commands (SC = SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI)
interlocked, or
6MD63 Manual 45
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via

a separate command. The position of the key-switch is irrelevant.
Auto: For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), the notes in the CFC hand-
book should be referred to (e.g. component: BOOL to command)
Switching Mode The dongle cable sets the switching authority of the device to Interlocked. The spec-
(for devices without ifications of the previous section apply.
operator panel)
Zone Controlled/ Zone Controlled (field interlocking) includes the verification that predetermined switch-
Field Interlocking gear position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors as well as verification
of the state of other mechanical interlocking such as High Voltage compartment doors
etc.
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for
device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition
for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired:
directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch,
or internal indication (marking), or
with logic using CFC.
When a switching command is initiated, the actual status of all relevant switching de-
vices is scanned cyclically.
Substation Control- Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other
ler (System Inter- bays evaluated by a central control system.
locking)
Double Operation Parallel switching operations are interlocked. When this function is enabled only one
control can be issued at a time. All control objects are checked prior to issuing a com-
mand.
Blocked by Protec- Not applicable for Input/Output Unit with Bay Controller 6MD63.
tion
Device Position For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device
(Scheduled = Actu- is already in the scheduled/desired position (Open/Closed; scheduled/actual compar-
al) ison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and an at-
tempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the op-
erating message scheduled condition equals actual condition. If the circuit breaker/
switchgear device is in the intermediate position, then this check is not performed.
Bypassing Bypassing configured interlocks at the time of the switching action happens device-
Interlocks internal via interlocking recognition in the command job or globally via so-called
switching modes.
G VQ=ORT
46 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Breaker Control
The switching modes interlocked or non-interlocked can be set via the key
switch. The position Test corresponds to non-interlocked switching and serves the
special purpose of unlocking the standard interlocks.
G REMOTE and DIGSI 4
Commands issued by SICAM or DIGSI 4 are unlocked via global switching mode
REMOTE. A separate job order must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking ap-
plies only for one switching operation and for command caused by the same
source.
Job order: command to object switching mode REMOTE, ON
Job order: switching command to switching device
G Derived command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):
Behavior is determined in the CFC block (Bool to command) via configuration
2.5.4 Recording and acknowledgement of commands
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing
and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message
processing centre. These messages contain message cause indication. The messag-
es are entered in the event list.
Acknowledgement All messages which relate to commands that were issued from the device front Com-
of commands to the mand Issued = Local are transformed into a corresponding response and shown in
device front the display of the device. A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning
is given in the SIPROTEC4 System Manual.
Acknowledgement The messages which relate to commands with the origin Command Issued = Local/
of commands to Remote/DIGSI must be send independent of the routing (configuration on the serial
- Local digital interface) to the initiating point.
- Remote
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indica-
- Digsi
tion as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback in-
formation recording.
Monitoring of The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feed-
feedback back information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the moni-
information toring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls
whether the device achieves the required final result within the monitoring time. The
monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time appears
and the process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the
execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of
the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback in-
formation, the command output resets.
The plus appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was suc-
cessful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a neg-
ative confirmation and means that the command was not fulfilled as expected.
6MD63 Manual 47
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
Command Output The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising
and Switching and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC4System Manual.
Relays
48 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Auxiliary Functions
2.6 Auxiliary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 6MD63 relay include:

G Message Processing
G Measurements
2.6.1 Message Processing
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective
relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason
message processing is done in three ways:
LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
Information to a Control Center
LED Display and Bi- Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs on the front panel of the
nary Outputs (Out- relay. The relay also contains output relays for remote signaling. All LEDs and binary
put Relays) outputs indicating specific messages can be freely configured. The relay is delivered
with a default setting. The SIPROTEC 4 System Manual gives a detailed description
of the configuration procedure. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with the
delivery status and the allocation options.
The output relays and the LEDs can be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (in-
dividually settable for each one).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are re-
established after restart of the device. However they can be reset as follows:
On site by pressing the LED key on the relay.
Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose.
Using one of the serial interfaces.
Condition messages should not be stored. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion
to be reported is cleared. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or sim-
ilar.
A green LED (RUN) displays operational readiness of the relay, and cannot be reset.
It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal oc-
currence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the
red LED (ERROR) lights up and the processor blocks the relay.
Fault Information Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front cover of the relay.
Display or Personal Using the front PC interface or the rear service interface, a personal computer can be
Computer connected, to which the information can be sent.
6MD63 Manual 49
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit
breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a
buffer battery. These messages can be retrieved, at any time, using the operating key-
pad in the display field, or transferred to a personal computer, using the serial operat-
ing interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the
SIPROTEC 4System Manual.
Transmitting If the device features a serial system port, stored information can be transmitted to a
Information to a central control and storage unit. Transmission is possible via different transmission
Control Center protocols.
2.6.1.1 Statistics
The number of circuit breaker operations is counted in the device based on the feed-
back information from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Operating hours The operating hours under load are also counted. The equipment is considered to be
in operation whenever a current threshold (I 0.04 IN) is exceeded by at least one
phase current. .
2.6.2 Measurements
Display of A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly avail-
Measured Values able for call up on site, or for data transfer (See table 2-7, as well as the following list).
A precondition for correctly displaying the primary and percentage values is complete
and correct entry of the nominal values for the voltage transformers, current transform-
ers, and protected equipment, in accordance with Subsections 2.1.2 and 2.1.3. Table
2-7 shows the formulas which are the basis for the conversion from secondary values
into primary values and percentages.
Tabelle 2-7 Conversion formula between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Value Second Primary %
ary
IA, IB, IC, ISEC.
I1, I2 CT PRIMARY I prim.
------------------------------------------- I SEC. --------------------------------------
CT SECONDARY FullScaleCurr.
IN = 3I0 IN SEC.
(calculated) CT PRIMARY I N prim.
------------------------------------------- I N SEC. --------------------------------------
CT SECONDARY FullScaleCurr.
IN = measured IN SEC.
value of the Ignd CT PRIM I N prim.
-------------------------------------------- I N SEC. --------------------------------------
I4 input Ignd CT SEC FullScaleCurr.
50 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Auxiliary Functions
Tabelle 2-7 Conversion formula between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured Value Second Primary %
ary
VA, VB, VC, Vg SEC.
V0, V1, V2, Vnom PRIMARY V prim.
-------------------------------------------------- V g SEC. -----------------------------------------------------
Vnom SECONDARY FullScaleVolt. ( 3 )
VA-B, VB-C, VC-A V SEC.
Vnom PRIMARY V prim.
-------------------------------------------------- V SEC. ------------------------------------
Vnom SECONDARY FullScaleVolt.
VN VN SEC.
Vnom PRIMARY V prim.
Vph Vdelta -------------------------------------------------- V N SEC. ------------------------------------------------
Vnom SECONDARY 3 FullScaleVolt.
P, Q, S no secondary values
(P and Q phase- Power
prim.
separated) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 (FullScaleVolt.) (FullScaleCurr.)
Power factor cos cos cos 100 in %

(phase-separat-
ed)
Frequency f in Hz f in Hz
f in Hz
----------------- 100
f Nenn
with
Parameter Adresse Parameter Adresse
Vnom PRIMARY 0202 Ignd-CT PRIM 0217
Vnom SECONDARY 0203 Ignd-CT SEC 0218
CT PRIMARY 0204 FullScaleVolt. 1101
CT SECONDARY 0205 FullScaleCurr. 1102
Vph / Vdelta 0206A
Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the op-
erating measured values listed below may not be available. The phase-to-ground volt-
ages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase-to-
ground, or they are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages Vab and Vbc and the
displacement voltage V0.
The displacement voltage is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-to-
ground voltages:
Vgn = 3V0/(Vph / Vdelta) with:

3V0 = (Va + Vb + Vc)
Vph/Vdelta = Transformation adjustment for ground
input voltage (setting 0206A)
6MD63 Manual 51
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
The ground current IG is either measured directly or calculated from the conductor cur-
rents:
3 I0 mit 3I0 = (Ia + Ib + Ic)
I G = -----------------------------------
I gnd-CT ( CT ) Ignd-CT = Parameter 0217 or 0218
CT = Parameter 0204 or 0205
In addition, the following may be available:

Minimum and maximum values for the three phase currents Ix; the three phase-
to-ground voltages Vxg; the three phase-to-phase voltages Vxy; the positive se-
quence components I1 and V1; the displacement voltage V0; the real power P, re-
active power Q, and apparent power S; the frequency; and the power factor cos ;
primary values. Included are the date and time they were last updated.
The long-term averages of the three phase currents Ix; the positive sequence
components I1 for the three phase currents; and the real power P, reactive power
Q, and apparent power S; in primary values. The period of time for averaging is se-
lectable.
Minimum and maximum values for the above mentioned long-term averages,
including the date and time they were last updated, in primary values.
Real and reactive energy flow (including direction of flow) in kWh, MWh, or GWh
primary; or in kVArh, MVArh, or GVArh primary. The measured-value resolution can
be configured.
RTD 1 to RTD 12 temperature values at the RTD-boxes.
The measured values are updated at a period of 0.3 s and 1 s.

The minimum and maximum values are listed with the date and time of the latest up-
date. Using binary inputs or a SCADA interface, the maximum and minimum values
can be reset. In addition, the reset can also take place cyclically, beginning with a pre-
selected point in time.
For the long-term averages mentioned above, the length of the time window for aver-
aging and the frequency with which it is updated can be set. The associated minimum
and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the integrated con-
trol panel in the DIGSI 4 operating program.
Transfer of Measured values can be retrieved by SCADA, or through DIGSI 4.

Measured Values
Set points To recognize extraordinary operational conditions, warning levels can be pro-
grammed. When a programmed limit value is exceeded (or fallen below), a message
is generated that can be masked to both output relays and LEDs. In contrast to the
actual protective functions, such as time-overcurrent protection or overload protection,
this monitoring program may becomes lower.
Ex works, the following individual limit value levels are configured:
Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase A
52 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Auxiliary Functions
Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase B

Exceeding a preset maximum average current in Phase C
Exceeding a preset maximum average positive sequence current
Exceeding a preset maximum average real power
Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power
Exceeding a preset maximum average apparent power
Exceeding a preset temperature
Falling below a preset pressure
Falling below a preset current in any phase
Falling below a preset power factor
2.6.3 Commissioning Aids
2.6.3.1 Test Messages to the SCADA Interface during Test Operation
If the SIPROTEC4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the
SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is
only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table Protocol-dependent
functions in the Appendix).
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred to
the central control system can be identified with an added message test operation-
bit while the device is being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the
messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system
disturbance or event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally
transferred via the SCADA interface can be blocked during the testing (block data
transmission).
Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using
the operating panel on the device, or with a PC and DIGSI 4 via the operator inter-
face.
The activation and deactivation of the test mode and transmission block is described
in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual.
2.6.3.2 Testing System Ports
If the device features a system port and uses it to communicate with the control center,
the DIGSI 4 device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted cor-
rectly.
A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the sys-
tem interface in the configuration matrix. In another column of the dialog box you can
specify a value for the messages you intend to test (e.g. ON/OFF). Having entered
password no. 6 (for hardware test menus) a message can then be generated. The as-
6MD63 Manual 53
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
sociated message will be issued and can then be retrieved in the operational annun-
ciations of the SIPROTEC device and also in the control center of the station.
A detailed description of the procedure is given in Subsection 3.3.2.
2.6.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled in DIGSI 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify
control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during
start-up.
A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs and LEDs of the device with their
present status. The operating equipment, commands, or messages that are config-
ured (masked) to the hardware components are displayed also. After entering pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus), you can switch to the opposite status in another
column of the dialog box. You can energize every single output relay to check the wir-
ing between 6MD63 and the system without having to create the alarm allocated to it.
Subsection 3.3.3 gives a detailed description of the procedure.
2.6.4 Programming Settings
Average Calcula- The selection of the time period for measured value averaging is set at address 8301
tion DMD Interval. The first number specifies the averaging time window in minutes
while the second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. A set-
ting of 15 Min., 3 Subs, for example, means that time average generation occurs
for all measured values that arrive within 15 minutes, and that output is updated three
times during the 15 minute window, or every 15/3 = 5 minutes.
The point in time where averaging begins (On The Hour, 15 After Hour, 30
After Hour or 45 After Hour) is set at address 8302 DMD Sync.Time. If the
settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the buffer are
deleted, and new results for the average calculation are only available after the set
time period has passed.
Minimum and The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a pro-
Maximum Values grammable point in time. To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET
should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is to take place (the minute of the
day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME. The
reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning
date of the cyclical process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered
at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START.
Limit Values Phase currents and the averages of the currents and powers can be monitored. These
are stationary monitors that cannot be used as pre-warning levels by time-overcurrent
protection, for example. The percentages are relative to the nominal device quantities.
Furthermore, it is possible to monitor the power factor, and connected 20 mA values
(if any).
54 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Auxiliary Functions
The settings are entered under MEASUREMENT in the sub-menu SET POINTS(MV) by
overwriting the existing values.
Power Meter Parameter 8315 MeterResolution can be used to maximize the resolution of the
metered energy values by Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard
setting.
2.6.4.1 Settings for Auxiliary Functions
Demand Measure-
ment Setup

8301 DMD Interval 15 Min per., 1 Sub 60 Min per., 1 Sub. Demand Calculation Intervals
15 Min per., 3 Subs
15 Min per., 15 Subs
30 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 10 Subs
5 Min per., 5 Subs
8302 DMD Sync.Time On the Hour On the Hour Demand Synchronization Time
15 Min. after Hour
30 Min. after Hour
45 Min. after Hour
Min/Max Measure-
ment Setup

8311 MinMax cycRESET NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
YES
8312 MiMa RESET TIME 0..1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESET- 1..365 day(s) 7 day(s) MinMax Reset Cycle Period
CYCLE
8314 MinMax- 1..365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

RES.START
Energy

8315 MeterResolution Standard Standard Meter resolution
Resolution Factor 10
Resolution Factor 100
6MD63 Manual 55
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions
2.6.4.2 Information List for Auxiliary Functions
Measured Values

00601 Ia = Ia
00602 Ib = Ib
00603 Ic = Ic
00604 In = In
00605 I1 = I1 (positive sequence)
00606 I2 = I2 (negative sequence)
00831 3Io = 3Io (zero sequence)
00621 Va = Va
00622 Vb = Vb
00623 Vc = Vc
00624 Va-b= Va-b
00625 Vb-c= Vb-c
00626 Vc-a= Vc-a
00627 VN = VN
00629 V1 = V1 (positive sequence)
00630 V2 = V2 (negative sequence)

00641 P = P (active power)
00642 Q = Q (reactive power)
00645 S = S (apparent power)
00644 Freq= Frequency
00832 Vo = Vo (zero sequence)
00901 PF = Power Factor
00996 Td1= Transducer 1
00997 Td2= Transducer 2
00991 Press = Pressure
00992 Temp = Temperature
00268 Superv.Pressure Supervision Pressure
00269 Superv.Temp. Supervision Temperature
01068 RTD 1 = Temperature of RTD 1
56 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Auxiliary Functions

01077 RTD10 = Temperature of RTD10
30701 P, L1 = P, L1 (active power, phase L1)
30704 Q, L1 = Q, L1 (reactive power, phase L1)
30707 PF, L1 = Power Factor, phase L1
Demand meter

00963 Ia dmd= I A demand
00964 Ib dmd= I B demand
00965 Ic dmd= I C demand
00833 I1 dmd= I1 (positive sequence) Demand
00834 P dmd = Active Power Demand
00835 Q dmd = Reactive Power Demand
00836 S dmd = Apparent Power Demand
Min/Max meter

00395 >I MinMax Reset >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00396 >I1 MiMaReset >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00403 >Idmd MiMaReset >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00412 > MiMa Reset >Theta MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
6MD63 Manual 57
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions

00851 Ia Min= Ia Min
00852 Ia Max= Ia Max
00853 Ib Min= Ib Min
00854 Ib Max= Ib Max
00855 Ic Min= Ic Min
00856 Ic Max= Ic Max
00857 I1 Min= I1 (positive sequence) Minimum
00858 I1 Max= I1 (positive sequence) Maximum
00837 IAdmdMin I A Demand Minimum
00838 IAdmdMax I A Demand Maximum
00839 IBdmdMin I B Demand Minimum
00840 IBdmdMax I B Demand Maximum
00841 ICdmdMin I C Demand Minimum
00842 ICdmdMax I C Demand Maximum
00843 I1dmdMin I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
00844 I1dmdMax I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
00397 >V MiMaReset >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00398 >VphphMiMaRes >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00399 >V1 MiMa Reset >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00400 >P MiMa Reset >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00401 >S MiMa Reset >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00402 >Q MiMa Reset >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00404 >Pdmd MiMaReset >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00405 >Qdmd MiMaReset >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00406 >Sdmd MiMaReset >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00407 >Frq MiMa Reset >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00408 >PF MiMaReset >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00859 Va-nMin= Va-n Min
00860 Va-nMax= Va-n Max
00861 Vb-nMin= Vb-n Min
00862 Vb-nMax= Vb-n Max
00863 Vc-nMin= Vc-n Min
00864 Vc-nMax= Vc-n Max
00865 Va-bMin= Va-b Min
58 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Auxiliary Functions

00867 Va-bMax= Va-b Max
00868 Vb-cMin= Vb-c Min
00869 Vb-cMax= Vb-c Max
00870 Vc-aMin= Vc-a Min
00871 Vc-aMax= Vc-a Max
00872 Vn Min = V neutral Min
00873 Vn Max = V neutral Max
00874 V1 Min = V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
00875 V1 Max = V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
00876 Pmin= Active Power Minimum
00877 Pmax= Active Power Maximum
00878 Qmin= Reactive Power Minimum
00879 Qmax= Reactive Power Maximum
00880 Smin= Apparent Power Minimum
00881 Smax= Apparent Power Maximum
00882 fmin= Frequency Minimum
00883 fmax= Frequency Maximum
00885 PF Min= Power Factor Minimum
00884 PF Max= Power Factor Maximum
00845 PdMin= Active Power Demand Minimum
00846 PdMax= Active Power Demand Maximum
00847 QdMin= Reactive Power Minimum
00848 QdMax= Reactive Power Maximum
00849 SdMin= Apparent Power Minimum
00850 SdMax= Apparent Power Maximum
Set Points

---- I Admd> I A dmd>
---- I Bdmd> I B dmd>
---- I Cdmd> I C dmd>
---- I1dmd> I1dmd>
00273 SP. I A dmd> Set Point Phase A dmd>
00274 SP. I B dmd> Set Point Phase B dmd>
6MD63 Manual 59
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Functions

00275 SP. I C dmd> Set Point Phase C dmd>
00276 SP. I1dmd> Set Point positive sequence I1dmd>
---- |Pdmd|> |Pdmd|>
---- |Qdmd|> |Qdmd|>
---- |Sdmd|> |Sdmd|>
00277 SP. |Pdmd|> Set Point |Pdmd|>
00278 SP. |Qdmd|> Set Point |Qdmd|>
00279 SP. |Sdmd|> Set Point |Sdmd|>
---- Press< Pressure<
---- Temp> Temp>
00270 SP. Pressure< Set Point Pressure<
00271 SP. Temp> Set Point Temp>
00284 SP. 37-1 alarm Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent alarm
---- 37-1 37-1 under current
---- |PF|< |Power Factor|<
00285 SP. PF(55)alarm Set Point 55 Power factor alarm
Energy

00924 WpForward Wp Forward
00925 WqForward Wq Forward
00928 WpReverse Wp Reverse
00929 WqReverse Wq Reverse
00888 Wp(puls) Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
00889 Wq(puls) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
60 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Installation and Commissioning 3
This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and
commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety
rules, safety regulations, and the operation of a power system.
Installation of the 6MD63 is described in this section. Connections for the device are
discussed. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are ex-
plained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also
given. Commissioning tests are provided. Some of the tests require the protected line
or equipment to carry load. Preparation for the initial energization of the device is cov-
ered.
3.1 Installation and Connections 62

3.2 Checking Connections 87
3.3 Commissioning 92
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 102
6MD63 Manual 61
C53000-G1840-C1013
Installation and Commissioning
3.1 Installation and Connections
Warning!
Trouble free and safe use of this SIPROTEC 4 device depends on proper transport,
storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this in-
struction manual.
Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in
a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and
international regulations.) These regulations must be observed. Failure to observe
these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or severe damage of property.
Requirements The rated device data is checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System
Manual. The compliance these data is verified with the power system data.
3.1.1 Installation
Panel Flush The device housing can be 1/2 or Full size depending on the version. For the 1/2 size
Mounting housing, there are four covers and four holes, as shown in Figure 3-1). There are six
covers and six holes for the full size housing, as indicated in Figure 3-2.
G Remove the 4 covers located at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 ad-
ditional covers located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the 4 respectively 6
slots in the mounting flange.
G Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four or six screws. For the
dimensions refer to Figure 4-1 or 4-2 in Section 4.6.
G Replace the four or six covers.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of
the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the panel.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
SIPROTEC 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs,
bending radii (optical cables), etc.
62 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Installation and Connections
Elongated
Holes SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 6MD63
Schlossplatz
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local
Annunciation F1 7 8 9
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Remote
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure3-1 Panel mounting of a 6MD63 (housing size 1/2)
Elongated SIEMENS SIPROTEC

Holes RUN ERROR 6MD63
Default Display
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
Fault Location With F4
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local Annunciation
Meas. Values F2 4 5 6
Remote Meas. Val
Trip log F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure 3-2 Panel mounting of a 6MD63 (housing size 1/1)
6MD63 Manual 63
C53000-G1840-C1013
Rack Mounting and In housing sizes 1/2 (Figure 3-3) there are 4 covers and 4 securing slots, with the hous-
Cubicle Mounting ing size 1/1 (Figure 3-4) there are 6 covers and 6 securing slots available.
To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The
ordering codes are stated in Appendix A, Section A.1.
G Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws.
G Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for size 1/1 the 2 covers lo-
cated centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. The 4 respectively.
6 slots in the mounting flange are revealed and can be accessed.
G Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
G Replace the four or six covers.
G Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws.
rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any oth-
er control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the
ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 6MD63
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Remote
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Mounting bracket
Figure 3-3 Installing a 6MD63 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/2 of 19 inch rack)
64 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 6MD63
MENU
1000 A
21 kV
LED CTRL ESC ENTER
Local
Meas. Val. F2 4 5 6
Remote
F3 1 2 3
Interlocking
OFF
F4 0 +/-
Normal
Figure 3-4 Installing a 6MD63 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/1 of 19 inch rack) as an example
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the rack.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
bending radii, etc.
Panel Surface G Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions refer to Figure
Mounting 4-3 to 4-5 in Section 4.6.
G Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The cross-
sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sec-
tional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the
cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connect solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area
2.5 mm2) to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the
device ground.
6MD63 Manual 65
C53000-G1840-C1013
G Connections according to the circuit diagram via screw terminals, connections for
optical fibres and electrical communication modules via the inclined housings.
bending radii, etc.
Mounting with For mounting the device proceed as follows:

Detached Operator G Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
Panel 10 screws. For dimensions see Section 4.6, Figure 4-6 and 4-7.
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device according to the circuit diagram.
When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before
having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw
heads are even with the terminal block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw
thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC 4 System Manual has pertinent infor-
mation regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
G For mounting the detached operator panel please observe the following:
G The removal of the 4 covers located at the corners of the front cover reveal 4 elon-
gated holes in the mounting bracket.
G Insert the operator panel into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. For di-
mensions refer to Figure 4-6 and 4-7 in Section 4.6.
G Mount the four covers.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the operator control element to the protec-
tive ground of the panel using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control con-
ductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at
least 2.5 mm2.
Caution!
Do never pull or plug the connector between the device and the detached operator
panel while the device is alive!
G Connect the operator panel to the device. Furthermore, plug the 68-pin connector
of the cable belonging to the operator panel into the corresponding connection at
the rear side of the device (see SIPROTEC 4 System Manual).
Mounting without For mounting the device proceed as follows:

Operator Panel
G Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
10 screws. For dimensions see Section 4.6, Figure 4-6 and 4-7.
panel. Using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire
must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected
to the device. The cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
66 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
G Connections are realized via the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side
of the device according to the circuit diagram.
When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before
having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw
heads are even with the terminal block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw
thread fits in the hole of the lug. SIPROTEC 4System Manual has pertinent infor-
mation regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
G For mounting the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable please observe the
following:
G Plug the 9-pin connector of the dongle cable with the connecting parts into the con-
trol panel or the cubicle door according to Figure 3-5. For dimensions refer to Figure
4-9 in Section 4.6.
G Plug the 68-pin connector of the cable into the corresponding connection at the rear
side of the device.
Caution!
Do never pull or plug the Donglecable while the device is alive! Without the cable the
device is not ready for operation!
The connector of the dongle cable at the device must always be plugged during
operation!
c b a c b a c b a
1 1 1 UH+
2 2 UH- 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
c 5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7
F 7
c
8 8 8
9 9
c
K 9
10 10 10
c 11 11 11
12 12a b c 12
13 a b c
c 13
14 14
c 15 15
16 16
c 17 17
18 18
a b c a b c
c b a
1
2
1
2 D C
3
4
Ch1
4 5
3
6
J 7
6 8
5
9
10
B A
8 11
7
12
Ch1
a b c
Control panel or
cubicle door
Figure3-5 Plugging the D-subminiature connector of the dongle cable into the control panel
or cubicle door (housing size 1/2 as an example).
6MD63 Manual 67
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.1.2 Connections
Elementary diagrams for device family 6MD63 are shown in Appendix A, Section A.2.
Anschlussbeispiele fr die Strom- und Spannungswandlerkreise befinden sich im An-
hang A.3. Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are pro-
vided in Appendix A, Section A.3. It must be checked that the setting configuration of
the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1), Section 2.1.2, corresponds with
the connections to the device.
Currents The Figures A-33 to A-35 show examples of the current transformer connection op-
tions for the model 6MD63.
Voltages The Figures A-36 to A-39 show examples of the voltage transformer connection op-
tions.
The device can either be connected with three phaseground voltages as shown in
Figure A-36 (address 0213 VT Connection = Van, Vbn, Vcn), or with two phase
phase voltages and 3V0 (also called the displacement voltage) from open delta VTs
as shown in Figure A-37 (address 0213 VT Connection = Vab, Vbc, VGnd). For
the latter, only the phasephase voltages can be connected as shown in Figures A-38
and A-39 (open delta VTs), or only 3V0 can be connected. In the device settings the
appropriate voltage connection must be entered under Address 0213, VT
Connection, in P.System Data1.
The maximum continuous voltage rating of a 6MD63 is 170 V. For the first case above
(phase-ground voltage connections), phase-phase voltages of up to [3 170V] =
294 V can be continuously applied. For the second case, the steady state phase-
phase voltages connected to the device must be 170 V or less.
Binary Inputs and The configuration of the binary in and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the plant
Outputs conditions, is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. The connections to the
plant are dependent on this actual configuration. The presettings of the device are list-
ed in Appendix A, Section A.4. Check also if the labelling corresponds to the allocated
message functions.
3.1.3 Hardware Modifications
3.1.3.1 General
Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the

pick-up threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain ap-
plications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In ei-
ther case, hardware modifications are needed. The modifications are done with jump-
ers on the printed circuit boards inside the device. Follow the procedure described in
Subsection 3.1.3, whenever hardware modifications are done.
Power Supply There are different ranges for the power supply voltage of the various power supplies.
Voltage Refer to the data for the 6MD63 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of the Appendix. The
power supplies of the different variants are largely interchangeable by modifying the
68 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
position of the jumpers. Jumper settings determine the rating. The assignment of
these jumpers to the supply voltages is described in Subsubsection 3.1.3.3. When the
relays are delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Gen-
erally, they need not be altered.
Life Contact The life contacts of the devices are changeover contacts. The NC contact or the NO
contact can be connected to the device connections via a plug-in jumper (X40). The
assignment of the plug-in jumper to the type of contact and the location of the jumper
is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.3.
Nominal Currents The input transformers of the device are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with
jumpers. The position of the jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The
assignment of the jumpers to the nominal rate and the arrangement of the jumpers is
described in 3.1.3.3.
All jumpers must be set for the same nominal current, i.e. a jumper (X61 to X63) one
jumper for each input transformer and additionally one jumper X 60.
Jumper X64 for the ground path is set to 1 A or 5 A (depending on the ordered variant)
irrespective of the other jumper positions.
Note:
If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be
registered in addresses 0205 CT SECONDARY/ 0218 Ignd-CT SEC in the Power
System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) (see Subsection 2.1.2).
Control Voltages When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
for Binary Inputs a voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In general, to
optimize the operation of the inputs, the pick-up voltage of the inputs should be set to
most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a
pick-up voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set
according to the function performed.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pick-up voltage of a binary input. The phys-
ical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pick-up voltages is de-
scribed in 3.1.3.3.
Replacing Only serial interfaces of devices for panel and cubicle flush mounting as well as of
Interfaces mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator panel are replace-
able. For more details on this matter refer to Subsubsection 3.1.3.4, Replacing Inter-
faces.
Configuring When the device is delivered from the factory, the serial interfaces are matched to the
RS232/RS485 ordered version according to the 11th and 12th figure of the ordering code of the de-
vice (or to the additional information of the ordering code). The configuration is deter-
mined by jumpers on the interface module. The physical arrangement is described be-
low, RS232/RS485 in Subsection 3.1.3.4.
Termination of If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 port or Profibus, they must be terminated
Serial Interfaces with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For
6MD63 Manual 69
C53000-G1840-C1013
this purpose, the printed circuit board of the central processor unit CPU and the RS485
or Profibus interface module are provided with terminating resistors that can be con-
nected to the system by means of jumpers. It is important to use only 1 of the options.
The position of the jumpers on the printed circuit board of the corresponding central
processor unit CPU is described in Subsubsections 3.1.3.3, see Processor Board
CPU and the position of the jumpers on the interface modules in Subsubsection
3.1.3.4, see RS485/RS232 und Profibus (FMS/DP) DNP3.0/Modbus. Both jumpers
must always be plugged in the same way.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
Spare Parts Spare parts can be the battery that provides for storage of the data in the battery-buff-
ered RAM in case of a power failure, and the miniature fuse of the internal power sup-
ply. Their physical location is shown in Figures 3-8 or 3-9. The ratings of the fuse are
printed on the board next the fuse itself. When exchanging the fuse, please observe
the hints given in the SIPROTEC4 System Manual in the chapter Maintenance.
3.1.3.2 Disassembly of the Device
Important!
It is assumed for the following steps that the the device is not operative.
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching
elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows:
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the de-
vice. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement name-
plates.
o Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to
damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
1 Philips screwdriver,
4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at loca-
tion A and C (7SJ64). This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mount-
ing.
o If there are additional interfaces on location B , C and D next to the interfaces at
location A to C (7SJ64), remove the screws located diagonally to the interfaces.
This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
70 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
o Carefully take off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable. With device versions with a detached operator panel it is possible
to remove the front cover of the device right after having unscrewed all screws.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part.
o Disconnect the ribbon cable between the front cover and the BCPU board () at the
front cover side. To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector
and push down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully draw out the plug con-
nector.
This action does not apply to the device version with detached operator panel. How-
ever, on the central processor unit BCPU () the 7-pole plug connector X16 behind
the D-subminiture connector and the plug connector of the ribbon cable (connected to
the 68pole plug connector on the rear side) must be removed.
o Disconnect the ribbon cables between the BCPU unit () and the input/output print-
ed circuit boards (depending on the version () and ()).
o Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD dam-
age. A greater effort is required to withdraw the BCPU board, especially in versions
of the device for surface-mounting, because of the communication connectors.
o Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-8 to 3-11 and the following information
Change or remove the jumpers as necessary.
The order of the boards for the individual device types and housings is shown in Fig-
ures 3-6 and 3-7.
6MD63 Manual 71
C53000-G1840-C1013
Module Arrange- Figure 3-6shows the arrangement of the modules for 6MD63 with housing size 1/2 and
ment of 6MD63 Figure 3-7 for the housing size 1/1.
1 Processor printed circuit board BCPU

2 Input/output printed circuit board BI/O-1
3 Input/output printed circuit board BI/O-2
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33
1 2 6MD631
BI1 to BI21 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI7 BI24
1 3 2 6MD632 and 6MD633
BI1 to BI8 to BI21 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI7 BI20 BI24
1 3 6MD634
BI1 to BI8 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI7 BI20
1 3 2 6MD637
BI1 to BI8 to BI21 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI7 BI20 BI33
Figure 3-6 Front view of the 6MD63 with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
72 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Prozessorbaugruppe
1 Processor p. c. b. BCPU
1 42 1 42 2 Input/output p. c. b. BI/O-1
3 Input/output p. c. b. BI/O-2
Slot 5 Slot 33 Slot 5 Slot 33
1 3 3 2
BI1 to BI8 to BI25 to BI21 to Binary Inputs (BI)

BI7 BI20 BI37 BI24
Figure 3-7 Front view of 7SJ635 and 6MD636 with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and
scaled down)
6MD63 Manual 73
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.1.3.3 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards
Processor Board There exist two different releases of the BCPU board with a different arrangement
BCPU for and setting of the jumpers. Figure 3-8 depicts the layout of the printed circuit board for
6MD63.../DD the B-CPU board for devices up to the release 6MD63.../DD, Figure 3-9 for devices of
release .../EE and higher.
For devices up to release 6MD63.../DD check the provided nominal voltage of the in-
tegrated power supply according to Table 3-1, the quiescent state of the life contact
according to Table 3-5 and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1
through BI7 according to Table 3-6. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1)
and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-8.
3
2
1
X51
1
2
3
X40
F1
3
2
1
X53
X21
L H
X22
L H
X23 X24 X25
L H L H L H
X52
4 3
2
X27
L
X26
1
L H
H
Front Cable Binder

Operator Time Syn-
Panel chronization
LithiumBattery 3 V/1 Ah,
(Port A)
+ Typ CR 1/2 AA
Battery
G1
Figure 3-8 Processor printed circuit board BCPU for 6MD63.../DDwith jumper settings required for the module
configuration
74 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Power Supply There is no 230-V AC power supply available for 6MD63.../DD.
Table 3-1 Factory Jumper Settings for the Nominal Voltage of the integrated Power Sup-
ply on BCPU for 6MD63.../DD
Jumper Nominal Voltage

60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 24/48 VDC
115 VAC
X51 1-2 2-3 Jumpers X51 through

X53 are not used
X52 1-2 and 3-4 2-3
X53 1-2 2-3
Can be inter-changed Not changeable
Live Status Contact
Table 3-2 Jumper Setting for Live Status Contact-Type brought out to device terminals,
on BCPU for 6MD63.../DD
Jumper Normally Open Contact Normally Closed Contact Factory Set

X40 1-2 2-3 2-3
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI7
Table 3-3 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1
through BI7 on the CPU Board for 6MD63.../DD
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC 88 VDC Pickup2)

Pickup1)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC
6MD63 Manual 75
C53000-G1840-C1013
Processor Board For devices of release 6MD63.../EE and higher check the provided nominal voltage of
BCPU for the integrated power supply according to Table 3-4, the quiescent state of the life con-
6MD63.../EE tact according to Table 3-5 and the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1
through BI7 according to Table 3-6. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1)
and of the buffer battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-9.
3
2
X51
1
2
3
1
X40
F1
3
2
1
X53
H
L
X23
X26
H
L
H L
X25
X21 X22 X24
4 3
H
L
X52
H
L
2
1
H
L
H L
X27
Front
Operator Cable Binder
Time Syn-
Panel chronization
LithiumBattery 3 V/1 Ah, (Port A)
+ Typ CR 1/2 AA
Battery
G1
Figure 3-9 Processor printed circuit board BCPU for 6MD63.../EE with jumper settings required for the module
configuration
76 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Power Supply There is a 230-V AC power supply available for 6MD63.../EE.
Table 3-4 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
processor printed circuit board BCPU for 6MD63.../EE
Jumper Nominal Voltage

60/110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC 24/48 VDC
115/230 VAC
X51 12 23 12
X52 12 and 34 23 none
X53 12 23 none
Live Status Contact
Table 3-5 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the
processor printed circuit board BCPU for 6MD63.../EE
Jumper Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state Presetting
X40 12 23 23
Pickup Voltages
of BI1 to BI7
Table 3-6 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1
through BI7 on the CPU Board for 6MD63.../EE
Binary Input Jumper 19 VDC Pickup1) 88 VDC Pickup2)
BI1 X21 L H
BI2 X22 L H
BI3 X23 L H
BI4 X24 L H
BI5 X25 L H
BI6 X26 L H
BI7 X27 L H
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
6MD63 Manual 77
C53000-G1840-C1013
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board BI/O1 is illustrated
BI/O1 in Figure 3-10. The set nominal currents of the current input transformers and the se-
lected operating voltage of the binary inputs BI21 to BI24 according to Table 3-7 are
checked.
The jumpers X60 to X63 must all be set to the same rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61
to X63) for each input transformer of the phase currents and in addition the common
jumper X60.
The jumper X64 determines the rated current for the input IE and may thus have a set-
ting that deviates from that of the phase currents.
1A 5A
X60
H
X24
X23
X22
X21
L
L
X62
X61
5A 1A 5A 1A
T2 T1
X73 AD2
X72 AD1
X71 AD0
H L
T3 T4
X63
X64
5A 1A 5A 1A
Figure3-10Input/output module BI/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings required for
the module configuration
78 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Pickup Voltages
of BI21 to BI24
Table 3-7 Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs
BI21 through BI24 on the BI/O-1 board
BI21 X21 L H
BI22 X22 L H
BI23 X23 L H
BI24 X24 L H
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115/230 VAC.
Bus address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the B I/O-1 board serve to set up the bus address.
The jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-8 shows the factory settings for the jump-
ers.
Table 3-8 Factory Settings for Jumpers X71, X72, and X73 on the BI/O-1 Board
Jumper 1/ Size and Full Size Housing

2
X71 L
X72 H
X73 L
6MD63 Manual 79
C53000-G1840-C1013
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the input/output board BI/O2 is illustrated
BI/O2 in Figure 3-11. Check the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI8 through
BI20, and BI25 through BI37, according to Table 3-9.
The assignment of the binary inputs to the printed circuit board is shown in Figures 3-
6 and 3-7.
X22
123
3 21
X24
X21
123
3 21
X26
X23
123
3 21
X28
X25
123
3 21
X29
X27
123
X30
123
X31
123
X32
123
X33
123
X73 X72 X71
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Figure3-11Jumpers on the BI/O-2 Board for the Binary Inputs BI8 through BI20, and BI25
through BI37. (Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 apply to 1/2 size housing)
80 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Pickup Voltages
of BI8 to BI20
Table 3-9 Factory jumper settings for the Pickup Voltages of the binary inputs BI8
through BI20 and BI25 through BI37on the BI/O-2 board
BI8 BI25 X21 1-2 2-3
BI9 BI26 X22 1-2 2-3
BI10 BI27 X23 1-2 2-3
BI11 BI28 X24 1-2 2-3
BI12 BI29 X25 1-2 2-3
BI13 BI30 X26 1-2 2-3
BI14 BI31 X27 1-2 2-3
BI15 BI32 X28 1-2 2-3
BI16 BI33 X29 1-2 2-3
BI17 BI34 X30 1-2 2-3
BI18 BI35 X31 1-2 2-3
BI19 BI36 X32 1-2 2-3
BI20 BI37 X33 1-2 2-3
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115/230 VAC.
Bus address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the BI/O-2 board serve to set up the bus address. The
jumpers must not be changed. Table 3-10 shows the factory settings for the jumpers.
Table 3-10 Factory Settings for Jumpers X71, X72, and X73 on the BI/O-2 Board
Jumper 1
/2 Size Housing Full Size Housing
Slot 33 Slot 5
X71 2-3 1-2 1-2
X72 1-2 2-3 1-2
X73 1-2 2-3 2-3
6MD63 Manual 81
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.1.3.4 Interface Modules
Exchanging Inter- The interface modules are located on the processor printed circuit boards CPU ( in
face Modules Figure 3-6 to 3-7) of the devices 6MD63. Figure 3-12 shows the printed circuit board
and the modules.
Mounting Location
(Rear Side of Housing)
Service interface Port C
System interface Port B
Figure3-12 Processor printed circuit board BCPU with interface modules
Please note the following:

G Only interface modules of devices with panel flush mounting and cubicle mounting
as well as of mounting devices with detached operator panel or without operator
panel can be exchanged. Interface modules of devices in surface mounting hous-
ings with double-level terminals must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre.
82 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Use only interface modules that can be ordered in our facilities

(see also Appendix A, Section A.1.1).
You may have to ensure the termination of the ports featuring bus capability accord-
ing to the marging heading Termination.
Table 3-11 Exchangeable interface modules
Interface Mounting Location/Port Exchange Modules

RS232
RS485
Optical 820 nm
Profibus FMS RS485
Profibus FMS Double Ring
Profibus FMS Single Ring
System Interface B
Profibus DP RS485
Profibus DP Double Ring
Modbus RS485
Modbus 820 nm
DNP 3.0 RS485
Optical DNP 3.0 820 nm
RS232
DIGSI 4/Modem Inter-
C RS485
face/RTD-box
Optical 820 nm
For the order numbers of the exchangeable modules please refer to Subsection A.1.3
Accessories in the Appendix.
RS232/RS485 The interface RS232 can be modified to interface RS485 and vice versa, according to
Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-12 shows the printed circuit board CCPU and the interface modules.
Figure 3-13 shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS232 on the interface
module.
Terminating resistors are not required. They are disconnected.
6MD63 Manual 83
C53000-G1840-C1013
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
Terminating Resistors X12 X5
Jumper disconnected 1 2 3 1 2 3
1
X11
2
X3 12 *) 3
X10
X4 12 *) 1 2 3 1
2
3
X13
*) Default Setting
C53207-
A324-B180
Figure 3-13 Location of the jumpers for configuration of RS232
CTS With jumper X11, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with the
modem.
Tabelle 3-12 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module
Jumper /CTS from interface RS232 /CTS triggered by /RTS

X11 12 23 *)
*) Default Setting
Jumper setting 23: the connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler
or optical fibre converter. Therefore the modem control signal according to RS232
standard DIN 66020 is not available. Modem signals are not required since communi-
cation to SIPROTEC devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Use con-
netion cable with ordering number 7XV51004.
Jumper setting 12: this setting makes the modem signal available, i. e. for a direct
RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC device and the modem this setting can
be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection
cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole).
Note: For a direct connection to DIGSI 4 with interface RS232 jumper X11 must be
plugged in position 23.
RS485/RS232 Interface RS485 can be modified to interface RS232 and vice versa, according to Fig-
ure 3-13.
Termination Busbar capable interfaces require a termination at the last device of the bus, i.e. ter-
minating resistors must be connected. For 6MD63 this applies to the variant with in-
terface RS485 or Profibus.
The terminating resistors are located on the corresponding interface module that is
mounted to the processor input/output board BCPU ( in Figure 3-6 to 3-7).
The module for interface RS485 is illustrated in Figure 3-14, the module for Profibus
(FMS and DP) and DNP3.0 and Modbus in Figure 3-15.
84 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
With default setting, jumpers are plugged in such a way that terminating resistors are
disconnected. For the configuration of the terminating resistors both jumpers have to
be plugged in the same way.
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
Terminating Resistors X12 X5
Jumper 1 2 3 1 2 3
connected disconnected 1
X11
2
3
X3 23 12 *) X10
1 2 3 1
X4 23 12 *) 2
3
X13
*) Default Setting
C53207-
A324-B180
Figure3-14 Location of jumpers for the configuration of terminating resistors of interface

RS485
Profibus (FMS/DP)
DNP3.0/Modbus
C53207-A322- 2 3 4
B100
B101
Terminating Resistors
Jump- 3 2 1
connected disconnected X4
er
X3 12 23 *) 3 2 1
X3
X4 12 23 *)
*)Default Setting
Figure 3-15 Location of jumpers for the configuration of terminating resistors at the interface Profibus (FMS and DP),
DNP3.0 and Modbus
The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection
module) as illustrated in Figure 3-16. In this case, the terminating resistors located on
the interface module must be disconnected.
+5 V
390
A/A
220
B/B
390
Figure3-16 Termination of the RS 485 interface (external)
6MD63 Manual 85
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.1.3.5 Reassembly of Device
To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:

o Carefully insert the boards into the case. The installation locations of the boards are
shown in Figure 3-6 to 3-7.
For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to in-
sert the processor circuit board BCPU board. The installation is easier with the lever.
o First plug the plug connectors of the ribbon cable into the input/output boards I/O and
then onto the processor module BCPU. Be careful to not bend any of the connecting
pins! Do not use force!
o Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor module
BCPU and the front cover into the socket of the front cover.
For the version with detached operator panel the latter is to be ignored. Instead the
plug connector of the ribbon cable connected to a 68pole plug connector on the rear
side of the device must be plugged into the plug connector of the processor circuit
board BCPU. The 7-pole plug connector X16 connected to the ribbon cable must be
plugged behind the D-subminiature female connector. Since the connection is protect-
Press the latches of the plug connectors together.
o Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
o Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing.
This activity is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting.
86 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Checking Connections
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Data Connections
The following tables list the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces of the de-
vice and the time synchronization interface. The position of the connections can be
seen in Figure 3-17.
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
RS232-LWL
9 6 6
6 9 9
1 5 5
P-Slave
AME
Oprerating Interface
front side Time Synchronization
Serial System Interfaces and Service Interface
rear side rear side
Figure3-17 9 pin D-subminiature Connector
PC Operating When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
Interface at Front the SIPROTEC device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix, Sub-
section A.1 for an ordering description of the cable.
Service Check the data connection if the service (port C) is used to communicate with the de-
Port vice via fix wiring or a modem. If the service port is used as input for one or two RTD-
boxes, verify the interconnection according to one of the connection examples given
in the Appendix A.3.2.
System (SCADA) When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control sys-
Interface tem, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and
the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission di-
rection. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other
device, and vice versa.
The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO
2110 (see also Table 3-13):
TxD data transmit
RxD data receive
RTS request to send
CTS clear to send
DGND signal/chassis ground
6MD63 Manual 87
C53000-G1840-C1013
The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends so that potential differences cannot
cause circulating currents to flow along the shield. In areas of extremely strong EMC
interferences, the interference immunity factor can be improved by leading the ground
wire in a separate shielded pair of strands.
.
Table 3-13 Installation of the D-Subminiature Port

Pin No. PC Interface RS 232 RS 485 Profibus FMS Slave, RS 485 Modbus, RS485
at Front Profibus DP Slave, RS485 DNP3.0, RS485
1 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected)
2 RxD RxD
3 TxD TxD A/A (RxD/TxDN) B/B (RxD/TxDP) A
4 CNTRA (TTL) RTS (TTL Pegel)
5 GND GND C/C (GND) C/C (GND) GND1
6 + 5 V voltage supply VCC1
(max. load < 100 mA)
7 RTS RTS *) *)
8 CTS CTS B/B (RxD/TxDP) A/A (RxD/TxDN) B
9
*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS 232 RTS signal to an RS 485 interface.
Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!
Termination The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B'
with a common relative potential C/C' (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface module RS485
(Figure 3-14) or on the Profibus module RS485 (Figure 3-15). The terminating resis-
tors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module) as illustrated in
Figure 3-16. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or the Profi-
bus interface module must be disconnected.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Time Either 5-VDC-, 12-VDC- or 24-VDC- time synchronization signals can be processed if
Synchronization the connections are made as indicated in Table 3-14.
Interface
Table 3-14 Pin-assignments for the D-subminiature port of the Time Synchronization
Interface
Pin- Designation Signal Meaning
No.
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4 *) *)
5 Shield Shield Potential
*) assigned, but not available
88 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Table 3-14 Pin-assignments for the D-subminiature port of the Time Synchronization
Interface
Pin- Designation Signal Meaning
No.
6
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC*) Input 24 V*)
9 Shield Shield Potential
*) assigned, but not available
Optical Fibers Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers guar-
antee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections
are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive.
The normal setting for the optical fiber interface isLight off. If this setting is to be
changed, use the operating program DIGSI 4, as described in the SIPROTEC 4
System Manual.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
Temperature If one or two 7XV566 temperature meters are connected, check their connections to
Meter (RTD-box) the ports (port C or D).
Verify also the termination: the terminating resistors must be connected to 6MD63
(see Subsection 3.1.3.4 at Termination.
For further information refer to the operating manual of 7XV566. Check the transmis-
sion settings at the temperature meter. Besides the baudrate and the parity observe
also the bus number.
For connection of one 7XV566 RTD-box:
Bus number = 0 (to be set at 7XV566)
For connection of two 7XV566 RTD-boxes:
Bus number = 1 for the 1st RTD-box (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD1 to 6),
Bus number = 2 for the 2nd RTD-box (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD7 to 12).
Please observe that the detector input 1 (RTD1) of the 1st RTD-box is reserved for the
input of the ambient temperature/coolant temperature for the overload protection.
6MD63 Manual 89
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.2.2 Checking Power Plant Connections
Warning!
The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore,
only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to un-
usually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values
see Sub-section 4.2.1 under Technical Data.
Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final oper-
ating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humid-
ity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final loca-
tion. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
o Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the
power supply and the measured voltages must be opened.
o Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the
system and connection diagrams:
G Are the current transformers grounded properly?
G Are the polarities of the current transformers the same?
G Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
G Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
G Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct?
G Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct?
G Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used), also refer to Subsection 3.1.2,
Currents?
o The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An
ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.
G Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 3-6 to 3-7).
G Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O board with the measured current and
measured voltage inputs ( in Figure 3-6 and 3-7). Furthermore, remove the print-
ed circuit board so that there is no more contact anymore with the plug-in terminal.
G At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that re-
ceives current from the CTs.
G Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any
connector pins! Do not use force!
G Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again.
G Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
90 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
o Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 1 A
for the meter is appropriate.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. The measured
steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter
merely indicates the charging current of capacitors.
o Check the polarity and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals.
o Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
o Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply connec-
tions.
o Apply voltage to the power supply.
o Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
o Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct. Note that the
device can be set for ABC rotation or ACB rotation under Address 0209 PHASE
SEQ.in P.System Data1.
o Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
o Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers and the other
primary equipment that is to be controlled by the 6MD63.
o Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
o Check the signalling connections.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
6MD63 Manual 91
C53000-G1840-C1013
3.3 Commissioning
Warning!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dan-
gerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is
not handled properly.
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
The main points to observe are:
The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections
are made.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply volt-
age has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.
After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds be-
fore re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firm-
ly established before the device is re-energized.
The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded, neither
during testing nor during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other mea-
surement quantities are connected and that the trip and close commands to the circuit
breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless ex-
pressly stated.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the cur-
rent leads to the device are disconnected!
For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for
the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without dan-
ger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.
Warning!
Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
92 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Commissioning
3.3.1 Testing mode and transmission blocking
If the SIPROTEC4 device is connected to a central or main computer system via the
SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is
only possible with some of the protocols availabel (see Table Protocol-dependent
functions in the Appendix).
If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by the device to the main system has
an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from
testing and not an actual fault or power system event.
If DataStop is set ON, transmission to the SCADA is blocked.
Both of these features should be checked. The procedures for setting Test mode and
DataStop are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual. Note that when
DIGSI 4 is being used, the program must be in the Online operating mode for the
test features to be used.
3.3.2 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface
Preliminary Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for
Remarks the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI 4 operational
function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test function in the
real operating mode of the device.
DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface
by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the
SIPROTEC4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit
breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!
Note:
After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test.
The system interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI 4:

G Double-click on the Online directory to open the required dialogue box.
G Click on Test and the functional options appear on the right side of the window.
G Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list
view. The dialogue box Testing System Interface opens (refer to 3-18).
Structure of the In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system in-
Dialogue Box terface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Status Scheduled the user has
to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message
6MD63 Manual 93
C53000-G1840-C1013
different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By double-
clicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.
Figure 3-18 Dialog Box: Generate indications
Changing the Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column Action you will be asked for
Operating State password n 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password mes-
sages can be issued. To do so, click on Send. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC4 - device or from the
substation.
As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is tested in
Direction Status Scheduled:
G Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)
G Click on Send and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central
station and shows the desired reaction.
Exiting the Test To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service
Mode while the start-up routine is executed. The dialogue box closes.
Test in Command The information beginning with > is transmitted towards the device. This kind of in-
Direction formation must be indicated by the central station. Check whether the reaction is cor-
rect.
f
94 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Commissioning
3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled using DIGSI 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring
from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not
be used while the device is in service on a live system.
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI 4
results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC de-
vice. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be
operated as a result of these actions!
Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annun-
ciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4
prior to the test.
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI 4 in the online operating mode:
G Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the de-
vice appear.
G Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
G Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialogue box of the same
name opens (see Figure 3-19).
Figure3-19 Dialogue box for hardware test example
6MD63 Manual 95
C53000-G1840-C1013
Structure of the The dialogue box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output
Test Dialogue Box relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an
appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components with-
in the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the Status column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is
displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch
symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the Scheduled column, which is next to the Status column. The intended
condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured
(masked) to the hardware components.
Changing the To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching
Hardware field in the Scheduled column.
Conditions
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first
hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition
change will be executed.
Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Binary Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between
Outputs the output relay of the 6MD63 and the plant, without having to generate the message
that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the
output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device func-
tions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a
switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command
cannot be executed.
G Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!).
G Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduledcell in the di-
alog box.
G The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading Exiting the Proce-
dure), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests.
Test of the Binary To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 6MD63 the condition
Inputs in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the
device checked.
To do this, the dialogue box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the phys-
ical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
G Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated.
G The response of the device must be checked in the Statuscolumn of the dialogue
box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below
under the margin heading Updating the Display.
If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switch-
ing in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test
function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the
96 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Commissioning
password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and
can only be activated via the hardware test function.
G Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading Exiting the Pro-
cedure).
Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components.
As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are sepa-
rated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware
test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protec-
tion function or operation of the LED reset key.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hard-
Display ware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully
performed,
for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
Procedure unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware com-
ponents are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.
3.3.4 Testing User-Defined Functions
A 6MD63 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, espe-
cially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be
checked.
Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user-defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Of particular importance are the possible interlocking conditions of the circuit
breakers and other primary switching devices. They must be considered and tested.
3.3.5 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing
Load Current The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary
[10% IN] quantities. Secondary load current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device
is necessary. With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the mea-
sured-values supervision elements in the device should pick up. If an element detects
a problem, the relevant condition can be viewed in the Event Log. If current summation
errors occur, then check the matching factors. See Subsection 2.1.2).
6MD63 Manual 97
C53000-G1840-C1013
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are
asymmetrical conditions in the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal
service conditions, the corresponding monitoring functions should be made less sen-
sitive. See Subsection 2.2.2).
Current and Currents and voltages can be seen in the display field on the front of the device under
Voltage Values Measurement. The quantities can also be viewed under Measurement in the
DIGSI 4 window. The currents and voltages displayed by the device can be com-
pared to the quantities measured by an independent source.
If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and correct-
ed after the line has been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been
short-circuited. The measurements must then be repeated.
Phase Rotation The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a
clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must
have been considered when the power system data was set (address 0209 PHASE
SEQ., refer to Subsection 2.1.1 ). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Fail
Ph. Seq. (FNo 00171) is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be
checked and corrected, if required, after the line has been isolated and current trans-
formers have been short-circuited. The phase rotation check must then be repeated.
Voltage The VT mcb of the feeder must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational
Transformer measured values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of
Miniature Circuit no consequence).
Breaker (VT mcb)
Check in the spontaneous messages that the VT mcb trip was entered (message
>FAIL:FEEDER VT ON in the spontaneous messages). Beforehand it has to be as-
sured that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages
as OFF, i.e. >FAIL:FEEDER VT OFF.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals
must be checked.
If the ONstate and OFFstate are swapped, the contact type (Hactive or Lactive)
must be checked and remedied.
Switch off the protected power line.
3.3.6 Directional Checks with Load Current
Load Current The connections of the current and voltage transformers are checked using load cur-
10 % IN rent on the protected line. The secondary load current must be at least 0.10 IN. The
load current should be in-phase or lagging the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive
load). The direction of the load current must be known. If there is a doubt, network
loops should be opened or other action taken to guarantee the direction of the load
current. The line remains energized during this directional test.
98 6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C1013
Commissioning
DThe direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially
the correlation of the measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is
checked. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction
(measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line (Figure 3-20).
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.
P Positive Real Power in

the Direction of the Line
SLoad = Apparent Power

Phasor
jQ
Negative Reactive Power Positive Reactive Power
Figure 3-20 Apparent Power
The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured val-
ues have the correct polarity. If both the active power as well as the reactive power
have the wrong sign, the polarity in addresse 0201 CT Starpoint must be checked
and rectified.
3.3.7 Checking the Temperature Measurement via RTD-box
After the termination of the RS485 port and the setting of the bus address have been
verified according to Subsection 3.2.1, the measured temperature values and thresh-
olds can be checked.
If temperature sensors are used with 2-phase connection you must first determine the
line resistance for the temperature detector being short-circuited. Select mode 6 at the
RTD-box and enter the resistance value you have determined for the corresponding
sensor (range: 0 to 50.6 ) to the RTD-Box.
When using the preset 3-phase connection for the temperature detectors no further
entry must be made.
For checking the measured temperature values the temperature detectors are re-
placed by settable resistances (e.g. precision resistance decade) and the correct as-
6MD63 Manual 99
C53000-G1840-C1013
signment of the resistance value and the displayed temperature for 2 or 3 temperature
values from table 3-15 are verified.
Table 3-15 Assignment of temperature and resistance of the detectors
Temperature in C Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100

DIN 43760 DIN 34760 IEC 751
50 74,255 89,106 80,3062819
40 79,1311726 94,9574071 84,270652
30 84,1457706 100,974925 88,2216568
20 89,2964487 107,155738 92,1598984
10 94,581528 113,497834 96,085879
0 100 120 100
10 105,551528 126,661834 103,902525
20 111,236449 133,483738 107,7935
30 117,055771 140,466925 111,672925
40 123,011173 147,613407 115,5408
50 129,105 154,926 119,397125
60 135,340259 162,408311 123,2419
70 141,720613 170,064735 127,075125
80 148,250369 177,900442 130,8968
90 154,934473 185,921368 134,706925
100 161,7785 194,1342 138,5055
110 168,788637 202,546364 142,292525
120 175,971673 211,166007 146,068
130 183,334982 220,001979 149,831925
140 190,88651 229,063812 153,5843
150 198,63475 238,3617 157,325125
160 206,58873 247,906476 161,0544
170 214,757989 257,709587 164,772125
180 223,152552 267,783063 168,4783
190 231,782912 278,139495 172,172925
200 240,66 288,792 175,856
210 249,79516 299,754192 179,527525
220 259,200121 311,040145 183,1875
230 268,886968 322,664362 186,835925
240 278,868111 334,641733 190,4728
250 289,15625 346,9875 194,098125
Temperature thresholds that are configured in the 6MD63 can be checked by slowly
approaching the resistance value.
100 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Commissioning
3.3.8 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local At the end of commissioning, actual 6MD63 tripping and closing should be verified for
Command all the relevant circuit breakers and primary switching devices. The feedback of the
status of the primary equipment, through the equipments auxiliary contacts to the bi-
nary inputs of the 6MD63, should be checked during the testing. Be sure the 6MD63
always indicates the true position of the equipment in the device messages.
The procedure for the control is described in the SIPROTEC4System Manual.
Make sure that the switching authority is set according to the source of commands that
is used. The switching mode can be chosen as interlocked or non-interlocked. Note
that non-interlocked switching presents safety risks.
Be fully aware that such testing can result in a trip-close-trip event of the circuit breaker
by an external reclosing device.
DANGER!
A successfully started test cycle can lead to the closing of the circuit breaker!
Control from a Re- If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system (SCADA) interface, the
mote Control Cen- corresponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also
tre take into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the
source of commands used.
6MD63 Manual 101

C53000-G1840-C1013
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly
fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.
Caution!
Do not use force! The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and
terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some
setting changes might have been made during commissioning. The input/output
configuration are especially important (Section 2.1.1) as well as the power system
data (2.1.2) , and activated Groups A through D (if applicable). All desired elements
and functions must be set ON. See Chapter 2. Keep a copy of all of the in-service set-
tings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC
4 System Manual.
The Annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the Event Log and
Trip Log. Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults.
To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU Annunciation Set/Reset. Refer to
Sub-section 7.1.1 if further assistance is needed. The numbers in the switching statis-
tics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing, or to values in
accordance with the user's practices. Set the statistics by pressing MAIN MENU An-
nunciation Statistic. Refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual if more in-
formation is needed.
Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were
picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed.
Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing
the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the
button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual
conditions.
The green RUN LED must be on. The red ERROR LED must not be lit.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
102 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data 4
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 6MD63 devices and the
individual functions of the devices, including the limiting values that under no circum-
stances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for devices equipped
with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional drawings.
4.1 General Device Data 104

4.2 Breaker Control 115
4.3 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection 115
4.4 User Defined Functions with CFC 116
4.5 Additional Functions 119
4.6 Dimensions 123
6MD63 Manual 103

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Nominal Frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current Inputs Nominal Current IN 1 A or 5 A

Burden per Phase and Ground Path
At IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
At IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA
Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
AC Current Overload Capability
Thermal (rms) 100 IN < 1 s
30 IN < 10 s
4 IN continuous
Dynamic (current pulse) 250 IN for 0.5 cycle
Voltage Inputs Secondary Nominal Voltage 100 V to 225 V AC

Measuring Range 0 V to 170 V AC
Burden at 100 V approx. 0.3 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
Thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
Measuring Trans- Input Current 0 mA DC to 20 mA DC

ducer Inputs Input Resistance 10
Burden 5.8 mW at 24 mA
4.1.2 Power Supply
Direct Voltage Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter

Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH DC 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 V DC
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage UH DC 110/125/220/250 VDC

Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 300 V DC
Permissible AC Ripple Voltage, peak to peak 15 % of the power supply voltage

to IEC 6025511
104 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
General Device Data
Power Consumption 6MD631 6MD632 6MD635

6MD633 6MD636
6MD634 6MD637
Quiescent approx. 4 W approx. 5,5 W approx. 7 W
Energized approx. 10 W approx. 16 W approx. 20 W
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit 50 ms at U 110 VDC

to IEC 6025511 20 ms at U 24 VDC
Alternative Voltage Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter

Nominal Power Supply Alternating Voltage 115 VAC 230 VAC
UH AC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 92 to 132 VAC 184 to 265 VAC
Power Consumption, Quiescent approx. 6 VA approx. 6 VA
Power Consumption, Energized approx. 20 VA approx. 20 VA
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit 200 ms
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs Number
6MD631* 11 (configurable)
Nominal Voltage Range 24 VDC to 250 VDC, bipolar
Binary Inputs BI 1....6; BI 8....19 BI 7; BI 20....24

BI 25....36 BI 37
Current Consumption, Energized approx. 0.9 mA approx. 1.8 mA
(independent of the control voltage)
Pickup Times approx. 9 ms approx. 4 ms
Switching Thresholds adjustable voltage range with jumpers

For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60 VDC UPU 19 VDC
and 60/110/125 VDC UDO 14 VDC
For Nom. Voltages 110/125 VDC UPU 88 VDC
and 220/250 VDC UDO 66 VDC
and 115/230 VAC
6MD63 Manual 105

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
Maximum Permissible Voltage 300 VDC

Impulse Filter on Input 220 nF Coupling Capacitor at 220 V with
recovery time > 60 ms
Output Relays Output Relay for Commands/Annunciations1) (see also General Diagrams in
High-duty relays (motor control)2 Appendix A.2)
Number and Information acc. to the order variant (allocatable):
Order Variant NO NO/NC (switch High-duty

1 1
Contact ) selectable) ) relay2)
6MD631 8 1
6MD632 11 1 4
6MD633 11 1 4
6MD634 6 1 4
6MD635 14 1 8
6MD636 14 1 8
6MD637 9 1 8
1)
Switching Capability MAKE 1000 W/VA
BREAK 30 W/VA
40 W resistive
25 W/VA at L/R 50 ms
Switching Voltage 250 V 250 V
Permissible Current per Contact / 5 A continous
Max. inrush peak 30 A 0,5 s 30 A 0,5 s
Permissible Current per Contact 5 A continous
and Total Current on common path 30 A for 0,5 s
Switching Capability for 28 V to 250 V 1000 W 2)
for 30 s for 24 V 500 W
Permissible relative closing time 1%
Operating time, approx.. 8 ms 8 ms
1
) ULlisted with the following nominal value:
120 V ac Pilot duty, B300
240 V ac Pilot duty, B300
240 V ac 5 A General Purpose
24 V dc 5 A General Purpose
48 V dc 0.8 A General Purpose
240 V dc 0.1 A General Purpose
120 V ac 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA)
240 V ac 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA)
2
) ULlisted with the following nominal value:
240 V dc 1.6 FLA
120 V dc 3.2 FLA
60 V dc 5.5 FLA
106 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
General Device Data
4.1.4 Communications Interfaces
PC Front Interface Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232,

9-pin DSUB port for connecting a personal
computer
Operation with DIGSI 4
Transmission Speed min. 4800 Baud; max. 115 20 Baud
Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1
Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 50 feet
Rear Service/Mo- Connection isolated interface for data transfer

dem Interface
Operation with DIGSI 4
Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Baud
for 7SJ63/64: max. 115 200 Baud
Factory Setting: 38400 Bd
RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 depends on order code
Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location C
9 pin DSUB port
for panel-surface on the case bottom
mounted case shielded data cable
Test Voltage 500 V AC
RS232
RS485
Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile
Fibre Optical Link
Connector Type STConnector
with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location C
with panel surface- at FO housing
mounted case on the case bottom
Optical Wavelength = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or
using glass fiber 62.5/125 m
Optical Link Signal Attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 m
Channel Distance max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles)
Character Idle State selectable: factory setting Light off
System (SCADA) IEC 608705103

Interface (optional)
RS232/RS485/ floating interface for data transfer
depends on order code to a master terminal
6MD63 Manual 107

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
RS232
Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location B
9 pin DSUB port
for panel surface- at the housing on the case bottom
mounted case
Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
RS485
Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location B
9 pin DSUB Port RS 485
for panel surface- at the housing on the case bottom
mounted case
Transmission Speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
Fibre Optical Link
Connector Type STConnector
with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location B
with panel surface- at housing
Character Idle State selectable: factory setting Light off
PROFIBUS RS485 (FMS and DP)
9 pin DSUB Port RS 485
for panel surface- at the housing on the
mounted case case bottom
Transmission Speed up to 1.5 M Baud
Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile at 93.75 kBd
500 m /1640 feet /0.31 mile at 187.5 kBd
200 m / 660 feet at 1.5 MBd
Profibus (FMS and DP)
Fibre Optical Link
Connector type integrated ST connector for OWG
direct access; for FMS single ring or
twin ring, depending on order
for DP only double ring
108 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
General Device Data
For Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location B

For Panel Surface- at the housing
Mounted Case on the case bottom
Transmission Speed up to 1.5 M Baud
recommended: > 500 k Baud with normal casing
57600 Bd with detached operator panel
Laser class 1 Under EN 608251/ 2 using glass fiber 50/125 m or
DNP3.0 / MODBUS RS485
9 pin DSUB Port
for panel surface- at the housing on the
mounted case case bottom
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission Speed max. 19200 Bd
DNP3.0 / MODBUS Fibre Optical Link
Connector Type STConnector transmitter/receiver
Connection with flush-mounted case rear panel, mounting location B
with panel surface- at the housing
Transmission Speed max. 19200 Bd
Clock Time Synchronization DCF77/IRIG BSignal

Connection For Flush-mounted Case rear panel, mounting location A
9 - pin DSUB port
For Panel Surface- at the double-deck terminal on
Mounted Case the case bottom
Signal Rated Voltage selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
Signal Levels and Burdens:
Rated Signal Voltage

5V 12 V 24 V
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
6MD63 Manual 109

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
VILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 at VI = 4 V 1930 at VI = 8.7 V 3780 at VI = 17 V
640 at VI = 6 V 1700 at VI = 15.8 V 3560 at VI = 31 V
4.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product Standards)

ANSI/IEEEC37.90.0,.C37.90.0.1,
C37.90.0.2
UL 508
DIN 57 435 Part 303
See also standards for individual tests
Insulation Tests Standards: IEC 602555, IEC 6087021

High Voltage Test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms) AC
All circuits except power supply,
Binary Inputs, and
Communications Interface
High Voltage Test (routine test) 3.5 kVDC
only power supply and binary inputs
High Voltage Test (routine test) 500 V (rms) AC
Only Isolated Communications
and Time Synchronization Interfaces
Impulse Voltage Test (type test) 5 kV (peak): 1.2/50 s: 0.5 Ws: 3 positive
All Circuits Except Communications and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s
and Time Synchronization Interfaces,
Class III
EMC Tests for Im- Standards: IEC 602556 and 22, (Product standards)
munity (Type Tests) EN 500822 (Generic standard)
DIN 57 435 Part 303 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
and C37.90.2
High Frequency Test 2.5 kV (Peak): 1 MHz: = 15 s;
IEC 60255221, Class III 400 Surges per s: Test Duration 2 s
and VDE 0435 Part 303, Class III Ri=200
Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV contact discharge: 15 kV air-
IEC 60255222 Class IV discharge, both polarities:150 pF:Ri=330
and IEC 6100042, Class IV
Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 27 MHz to 500 MHz
non-modulated
IEC 60255223 (Report) Class III
Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 80 MHz to1000 MHz: 80 % AM:
amplitude modulated 1 kHz
IEC 6100043, Class III
110 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
General Device Data
Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 900 MHz: repetition frequency

Pulse Modulated 200 Hz: duty cycle of 50 %
IEC 6100043/ENV 50204, Class III
Fast Transient Disturbance Variables/ 4 kV: 5/50 ns: 5 kHz: Burst length = 15 ms;
Burst IEC 60255224 and repetition rate 300 ms: both polarities:
IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV Ri = 50 : Test Duration 1 min
High Energy Surge Voltages
(SURGE), IEC 6100045
Installation Class 3
Power Supply common mode: 2 kV: 12 : 9 F
diff. mode: 1 kV: 2 : 18 F
Measuring Inputs, Binary Inputs common mode: 2 kV: 42 : 0.5 F
and Relay Outputs diff. mode: 1 kV: 42 : 0.5 F
Line Conducted HF, amplitude module.10 V: 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 80 % AM: 1 kHz
IEC 6100046, Class III
Power System Frequency Magnetic 30 A/m continuous: 300 A/m for 3 s: 50 Hz
Field IEC 6100048, Class IV 0.5 mT: 50 Hz
IEC 602556
Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability 2.5 to 3 kV (Peak Value): 1MHz to 1.5 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave: 50 surges per s:
duration 2 s: Ri = 150 to 200
Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. 4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 Pulse per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities: Duration 2 s: Ri = 80
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 35 V/m: 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated
Damped Oscillations 2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating
similar to IEC 60694412, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz,
IEC 61000412 Ri = 200
EMC Tests For Standard: EN 500811 (Generic Standard)

Noise Emission
Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
(type test)
Only Power Supply Voltage Limit Class B
IECCISPR 22
Radio Noise Field Strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IECCISPR 22 Limit Class B
Harmonic Currents Device is to be assigned Class D
on the Network Lead at 230 VAC*) (applies only for devices with > 50 VA
IEC 6100032 power consumption)
Voltage Variations Limits are observed
and Flicker on the Network Lead
at 230 VAC
IEC 6100033
6MD63 Manual 111

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Standards: IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068

Shock Stress Dur-
Vibration Sinusoidal
ing Operation
IEC 60255211, Class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm Amplitude;
IEC 6006826 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255212, Class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068227 3 shocks in each direction of
3 orthogonal axes
Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255213, Class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz 3.5 mm Amplitude
IEC 6006833 (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm Amplitude
(Vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontale axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(Vertical axis)
Frequency Sweep Rate1 Octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Standards: IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682

Shock Stress Dur-
Vibration Sinusoidal
ing Transport
IEC 60255211, Class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm Amplitude;
IEC 6006826 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255212, Class1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
Continuous Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255212, Class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Ambient Tempera- Type tested (acc. IEC6008621 13F to +185F or 25 C to +85 C

tures1) and 2, Test Bd, for 16 h)
Limiting temporary (transient)
operating temperature 4F to +158F or 20 C to +70 C
112 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
General Device Data
Recommended permanent operating +23F to +131F or 5 C to +55 C

temperature (acc. IEC 602556)
Visibility of display may be impaired at
+131F (or +55 C) and above
Limiting temperatures for storage 13F to +131F or 25 C to +55 C

Limiting temperatures for transport 13F to +158F or 25 C to +70 C
STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING.
1
) ULcertified (Standard 508, Industrial Control Equipment):
Limiting temperatures for normal operation
(output relays not energized) 23F to +158F or 5 C to +70 C
Limiting temperatures with max. load
(max. cont. permissible energization
of inputs and outputs) 23F to +104F or 5 C to +40
Humidity Permissible Humidity Mean value per year 75% relative

humidity, on 56 days of the year up to 93%
relative humidity.
CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to
direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause conden-
sation to occur.
4.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical
utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure elec-
tromagnetic compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following are recommended:
All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as
the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge
suppression components.
For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
Do not withdraw or insert individual modules while the protective device is ener-
gized. When handling the modules or the device outside of the case, standards for
components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The mod-
ules and device are not endangered when inserted into the case.
6MD63 Manual 113

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
4.1.9 Certifications
UL listing UL recognition
6MD63B 6MD63A
6MD63C Models with 6MD63D Models with
threaded termi- plugin termi-
6MD63E nals 6MD63G nals
6MD63F
4.1.10 Construction
Case 7XP20
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.6
Variant Case Size Weight (mass)

6MD631/2/3/4/7B in surface mounting housing 1/ 16.5 pounds (7,5 kg)
2
6MD635/6B in surface mounting housing 1/

1 33 pounds (15 kg)
1/
6MD631/2/3/4/7D/E in flush mounting housing 2 14.3 pounds (6,5 kg)
6MD63/5/6D/E in flush mounting housing 1/ 28.6 pounds (13 kg)
1
6MD631/2/3/4/7A/C in housing for detached operator panel 1/

2 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
1/
6MD63/5/6A/C in housing for detached operator panel 1 33 pounds (15 kg)
6MD631/2/3/4/7F/G in housing without operator panel 1/ 17.6 pounds (8 kg)
2
6MD63/5/6F/G in housing without operator panel 1/ 33 pounds (15 kg)

1
Detached operator panel 5.5 pounds (2,5 kg)
International Protection Under IEC 60529

for the equipment
in the surface mounted case IP 51
in the flush mounted case and in model
with the offsett operating element
Front IP 51
Back IP 50
For personal protection IP 2x Terminals covered with cap
ULcertification conditions: For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1
Enclosure
114 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Breaker Control
4.2 Breaker Control
Number of Controlled Switching Depends on the number of binary Devices

Device (e.g. Circuit Breakers) inputs and outputs available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages (Feedback) Feedback messages; closed, open,
intermediate position
Control Commands Single command, double command
Operating Command to 1, 1 plus 1 common, or 2 contacts
Switching Device
Programmable Logic Controller PLC logic, graphic input tool
Local Control Control via menu control, assignment of
function keys
Remote Control Using communication interfaces
SCADA
DIGSI 4 (e.g. via modem)
4.3 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection
Temperature Connectable RTD-boxes 1 or 2

Detectors
Number of temperature detectors
per RTD-box max. 6
Type of measurement Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120
Mounting identification Oil or Ambient or Winding or
Bearing or Other
Thresholds for for each measuring point:

Indications
Stage 1 50 C to 250 C (in increments of 1 C)
58 F to 482 F (in increments of 1 F)
or (no indication)
Stage 2 50 C to 250 C (in increments of 1 C)
58 F to 482 F (in increments of 1 F)
or (no indication)
6MD63 Manual 115

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
4.4 User Defined Functions with CFC
Function Modules Function Modules and Task Levels
Task Level
Function Modules Description MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
Meter Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking
processing
ABSVALUE Magnitude X
Calculation
ADD Addition X X X X
AND AND-Gate X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to X X
Control
(Conversion)
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to X X X
Double Point
(Conversion)
BOOL_TO_IC Boolean to X X X
Internal Single
Point Indication
(Conversion)
BUILD_DI Create Double X X X

Point Indication
CMD_CHAIN Switching X X
Sequence
CMD_INF Command X
information
CONNECT Connection X X X
D_FF D-Flipflop X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status Memory for X X X X

Restart
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point X X X

Indication to
Boolean
(Conversion)
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode Double X X X X

Point Indication
DYN_OR Dynamic Or X X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non X

linear Curve
116 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
User Defined Functions with CFC
Task Level
Function Modules Description MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
Meter Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking
processing
LONG_TIMER Timer X X X X
(max. 1193 h)
LOOP Feedback Loop X
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit X
MUL Multiplication X X X X
NAND NAND-Gate X X X
NEG Negator X X X
NOR NOR-Gate X X X
OR OR-Gate X X X
RS_FF RS-Flipflop X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR-Flipflop X X X
SUB Subtraction X X X X
TIMER Timer X X
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X
X_OR XOR-Gate X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero suppression X
Limits Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels
Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS

MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) 2536
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) 300

PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) 130
SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) 2173
Processing times in TICKS required by the individual elements
Individual Element Amount of TICKS

Module, basic requirement 5
each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1
Connection to an input 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each configuration sheet 1
6MD63 Manual 117

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
Additonal limits for the following 4 CFCblocks
Run-Time Level Maximum Number of Blocks in the

Sequence Levels Already Mentioned
LONG_TIMER TIMER CMD_CHAIN D_FF_MEMO
MW_BEARB ---- ----
PLC1_BEARB 18 50
9 20
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB ---- -----
118 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Additional Functions
4.5 Additional Functions
Operational Mea- Operating Measured Values for Currents in A or kA primary; in A secondary,

sured Values Ia, Ib, Ic or in % of INom
- Range 10% to 200% INom
- Tolerance*) 1% of measure value or 0.5 % of INom
IG and 3I0 in A or kA primary; in A secondary and
or in % of INom
Positive sequence current I1 in A or kA primary; in A secondary,

or in % of INom
Negative sequence current I2 in A or kA primary; in A secondary and
or in % of INom
Operating Measured Values in kV primary; in V secondary

for Voltages (phase-ground) or in % of VNom
Va, Vb, Vc
- Range 10% to 120% VNom
- Tolerance*) 1% of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom
Operating Measured Values in kV primary; in V secondary
for Voltages (phase-phase) or in % of VNom
Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a
- Range 10% to 120% VNom
- Tolerance*) 1% of measured value or 0.5 % of VNom
VGND and V0 in kV primary; in V secondary
or in % of VNom
Positive sequence voltage V1 in kV primary; in V
Negative sequence voltage V2 secondary or in % of VNom
Operating Measured Values
for Power in kVA (MVA or GVA) primary, and in
S, Apparent Power % SNom
- Range 0% to 120% SNom
- Tolerance*) 2% SNom
for V/VNom and I/INom = 50% to 120%
with SNom = 3 VNom INom
P, Real power (with sign, in kW (MW or GW) primary, and
total and phase-segregated) in % SNom
and |cos | = 0.707 to 1
Q, Reactive power (with sign, in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and
total and phase-segregated) in % SNom
*) at f = fN
6MD63 Manual 119

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data

and |sin | = 0.707 to 1
for Power Factor total and phase-segregated)
cos
- Range -1 to 1
- Tolerance*) 5% for |cos | 0.707
for Frequency
f in Hz (displayed with primary values)
- Range fN 5 Hz
- Tolerance*) 20 mHz
Operating Measured Values for
the Measurement Transducer
- Operating Range 0 mA to 24 mA
- Accuracy Range 1 mA to 20 mA
- Tolerance 1.5% relative to nominal value of 20 mA
For Standard Usage of the Measurement Transducer for Pressure and Temperature
Monitoring:
Operating Measured Value Pressure in hPa
for Pressure
- Operating Range (pre-set) 0 hPa to 1200 hPa
Operating Measured Value Temperature in C
for Temperature
- Operating Range (pre-set) 0 C to 240 C
Measured values of the RTD-box see Section 4.3 (RTD-boxes)
*) at f = fN
Long-Term Mean Time Window 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes

Value
Frequency of Updates adjustable
Long-Term Means of
Currents Ia dmd, Ib dmd, Ic dmd, I1 dmd in A (kA)
Real Power Pdmd in W (kW, MW)
Reactive Power Qdmd in VAr, (kVAr, MVAr)
Apparent Power Sdmd in VA, (kVA, MVA)
Min/Max Report Report of Measured Values with date and time

Reset Automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to
1439 min).
Time frame and starting time
adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days, and ).
Reset Manual Using binary input
Using keypad
Using communication
120 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Additional Functions
Min/Max Values for Current Ia, Ib, Ic, I1 (positive sequence)

Min/Max Values for Voltages Va-n, Vb-n, Vc-n, V1 (positive sequence)
Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, Vn
Min/Max Values for Power/ Other S, P, Q, cos , Frequency
Min/Max Values for Averages IAdmd, IBdmd, ICdmd, I1dmd
(positive sequence)
(LOG of Primary Values) Sdmd, Pdmd, Qdmd
Measured Values Current Asymmetry Imax/Imin > I - balance factor, for I > I - bal-
Supervision ance limit. Factor and limit are adjustable.
Voltage Asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > V - balance factor,for V > V -
balance limit. Factor and limit are
adjustable.
Current Sum | ia+ib+ic+[kn in] | > I - sum
threshold value, adjustable.
kn = CTn ratio / CTphase ratio
Current Phase Sequence Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB)
Voltage Phase Sequence Clockwise (ABC)/ counter-clockwise (ACB)
Limit Value Monitor Ia > Limit value IA dmd>
Ib > Limit value IB dmd>
Ic > Limit value IC dmd>
I1 > Limit value I1 dmd>
IL < Limit value 37-1
cos < Lower limit value |cos |<
P > Limit value |Pdmd|>
Q > Limit value |Qdmd|>
S > Limit value Sdmd>
Pressure < Lower limit value Press<
Temperature > Limit value Temp>
Time Stamping Resolution for Event Log 1 ms

Time Deviation (Internal Clock) Maximum 0.01%
Buffer Battery Lithium Battery, 3 V / 1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
Self-discharging time > 5 years
Message Fail Battery if
battery charge is low
Energy Counter Values for Energy Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh
(MVARh or GVARh)
- Range 28 bit or 0 to 268435455 decimal for
IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW protocol)
31 bit or 0 to 2147483647 decimal for
other protocols (other than VDEW)
- Tolerance*) 5% for I > 0.5 INom, V> 0.5 VNom and
|cos | 0.707
Statistics (Circuit Saved Number of Trips Up to 9 digits

Breaker)
6MD63 Manual 121

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
Operating Hours Operating Hours Range Up to 7 digits

Counter Criterion to Count Current exceeds an fixed current
threshold (I 0,04 IN)
Commissioning Phase Rotation Field Check

Start-up Aids Operating Measured Values
Circuit Breaker / Switching Device Test
Clock Time Synchronization IRIG-B/DCF77-signal

Binary signal
Communication
Operating Modes for Time Tracking
# Operating Mode Explanations

1 Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (pre-set)
2 IEC 608705103 External synchronization using SCADA interface

(IEC 608705103)
3 PROFIBUS FMS External synchronization using PROFIBUS interface
4 IRIG B Time signal External synchronization using IRIG B
5 DCF77 Time signal External synchronization using DCF 77
6 SIMEAS Time signal Sync. External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box
Box
7 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary input
122 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Dimensions
4.6 Dimensions
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/2 x 19)
29 30 225 (8.86)
29.5 172 (6.77) 34 29.5 172 (6.77) (1.14) (1.18) 220 (8.66)
(1.16) (1.34) (1.16)
Mounting plate Mounting plate
F
R K
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
C
2 2
(0.08) (0.08) Q J
B A
34
(1.34)
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals) Rear view
221 +2 (8.70 +0.08 )

255.8 0.3 (10.07 +0.01 )
245 + 1 (9.64 +0.04 )
5 (0.20) or M4
Dimensions in mm
Values in brackets in inches
6 (0.24)
(0.21)
5.4
180 0.5 (7.09 0.02 )

206.5 0.3 (8.13 0.01 )
13.2
(0.52)
Panel cut-out
7.3
(0.29)
Figure 4-1 Dimensions 6MD63 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/2 x 19)
6MD63 Manual 123

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/1 x 19)
29 30
29.5 172 (6.77) (1.14) (1.18)
29.5 172 (6.77) 34
(1.16) (1.34) (1.16)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
244 (9.61)
Dimensions in mm
2 2
(0.08) (0.08)
34
(1.34)
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
450 (17.72)
445 (17.52) 446 +2 (17.56 +0.08)
6 (0.24)
255.8 0.3 (10.07 0.01)
5 (0.20)
F or M4
245 + 1 (9.64 + 0.03)
R L K
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)
6 (0.24) 6 (0.24)
or M4 or M4
C
5 (0.20)
Q M J or M4 6 (0.24)
B A
(0.21)
5.4
13.2
13.2 216.1 0.3 (8.51 0.01) (0.52)
(0.52)
Rear view 425.5 0.3 (16.75 0.01) 13.2
7.3 (0.52)
(0.29)
panel cut -out

(view from the device front)
Figure 4-2 Dimensions 6MD63 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/1 x 19)
124 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Dimensions
Housing for Panel

Surface Mounting
(Size 1/3 x 19)
165 (6.50)
144 (5.76) 10.5 (0.41) 260 (10.24)
31 45
29.5 (1.16)
46 60
150 (5.91)
280 (11.02)
320 (12.60)
344 (13.54)
266 (10.47)
25
1 15
9 30
(0.35)
16 72(2.83) 52 (2.05)
71 (2.80) Dimensions in mm
(0.98) Values in brackets in inches
Front view Side view
Figure 4-3 Dimensions 6MD63 for panel surface mounting (size 1/3 x 19)
Housing for Panel

Surface Mounting
(Size 1/2 x 19)
240 (9.45)
219 (8.62) 10.5 260 (10.24)
(0.41)
51 75
29.5
76 100 (1.16)
266 (10.47)
225 (8.86)
280 (11.02)
320 (12.60)
344 (13.54)
(0.98)
25
1 25
9 26 50 72 52
(0.35) 71 (2.83) 2.05)
(2.80)
Front view Side view
Dimensions in mm
1/
Figure 4-4 Dimensions 6MD63 for panel surface mounting (size 2 x 19)
6MD63 Manual 125

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
Housing for Panel

Surface Mounting
(Size 1/1)
465 (18.31) 260 (10.24)

444 (17.48) 10.5
29.5
(0.41)
(1.16)
101 150
151 200
266 (10.47)
450 (17.72)
280 (11.02)
320 (12.60)
344 (13.54)
(0.98)
25
1 50 72 52
9 51 100 71 (2.83) 2.05)
(0.35) (2.80)
Side view
Front view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-5 Dimensions 6MD63 for panel surface mounting (size 1/1 x 19)
126 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Dimensions
Housing for
Mounting with
Detached
Operator Panel
(Size 1/2 x 19)
(1.14) (1.18)
209.5 (8.25) 34 (1.34) 209.5 (8.25) 29 30 225 (8.86)
220 (8.66)
F
R K
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
C
Q J
B A
34
(1.34)
Side view (with screw terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals) Rear view
4.5 (0.18)
300 0.3 (11.81 0.01)
Dimensions in mm
6.4 (0.25)
12.5 (0.49) 100 0.3 (3.93 0.11)
200 0.3 (7.87 0.11)
Mounting Holes of
Mounting Plate
Figure 4-6 Dimensions 6MD63 for mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/2 x 19)
6MD63 Manual 127

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
Housing for
Mounting with
Detached
Operator Panel
(Size 1/1 x 19)
(1.14) (1.18)
Mounting Plate Mounting Plate
209.5 ( 8.25) 34 (1.34) 209.5 (8.25) 29 30
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
266 (10.47)
312.8 (12.31)
244 (9.61)
34 (1.34)
Side View (with Screw Terminals) Side View (with Screw Terminals)
4.5 (0.18)
F
R L K
300 0.3 (11.81 0.01)
C
Q M J
B A
6.4 (0.25)
25 100 0.3 (3.94 0.01)
Rear View
200 0.3 (7.87 0.01)
300 0.3 (11.81 0.01)
400 0.3 (15.75 0.01)
Mounting Holes of Mounting Plate
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-7 Dimensions 6MD63 for mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/1 x 19)
128 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Dimensions
Detached
Operator Panel
(1.16) (1.06) 68-pin Connection Cable

Mounting Plate to Device
29.5 27
Length 2.2 m (0.09) 225 (8.86)
220 (8.66)
246.2 (9.69)
266 (10.47)
2 (0.08)
Side View Rear View
221 + 2 (8.70 + 0.08)
5 (0.20)
or M4
255.8 0.3 (10.07 0.01)
247.2 + 1 (9.73 + 0.04)
6 (0.24)
180 0.5 (7.07 0.02)

4.3 (0.17)
206.5 0.3 (8.13 0.01)
13.2 (0.52)
Panel Cut-Out
7.3 (0.29)
Figure 4-8 Dimensions of a detached operator panel for a 6MD63 device
6MD63 Manual 129

C53000-G1840-C1013
Technical Data
D-Subminiature
Connector of the
Dongle Cable
(Panel or Cubicle
40 0,2
Dimensions in mm
34 1
Door Cutout)
4,5 oder M4
20 1
Panel cutout or cubicle door cutout
Figure 4-9 Dimensioned drawing for the panel cutout or cubicle door cutout of the D-sub-
miniature connector of the dongle cable for 6MD63 without integrated operator
panel n
130 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides
ordering information for the models of 6MD63. General diagrams indicating the termi-
nal connections of the 6MD63 models are included. Following the general diagrams
are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to primary equipment
in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and all informa-
tion available in a 6MD63 equipped with all options are provided. Default settings are
also given.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 132

A.2 Elementary Diagrams 139
A.3 Connection Examples 171
A.4 Default Settings 179
A.5 Interoperability List 187
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions 189
A.7 Functions Overview 190
A.8 Settings 190
A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information 198
A.10 Information List 203
A.11 Measured Values 212
6MD63 Manual 131

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

A.1.1 Ordering Information 6MD63 V4.4 (present release .../EE and higher)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SIPROTEC 4 Input/Output Unit with Local Control Order No. 6MD63

_ _ AA0
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Inputs
Housing 1/2 19, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/2 19, 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 2
Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact 3
Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 6 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact1) 41)
Housing 1/1 19, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 MT, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 6
Housing 1/2 19, 33 BI, 9 BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact1) 71)
Measuring Inputs
No analog inputs 0
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A 1
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 5 A 5
Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting

24 to 48 VDC, Binary Input Threshold 19 VDC 2
110 to 250 VDC, 115/230 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel A
Installation in a low-voltage compartment
Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom B
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), detached operator panel C
Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) E
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), without operator panel F
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, without operator panel G
Region-specific Default/ Language Settings and Function Versions
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language American English (Language can be changed) C
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language French (Language can be changed) D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language Spanish (Language can be changed) E
System Interface - Rear Port B
No system interface 0
IEC-Protocol, RS232 1
IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 4
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector2) 52)
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 2) 62)
For further interface options see Additional Information L 9
siehe Seite 133
11
Additional Information L + L
System Interfaces (Device Rear)
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 0 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector2) 0 B2)
Modbus RS485) 0 D
Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector3) 0 E3)
DNP3.0, RS485 0 G
DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector3) 0 H3))
1) Only available if 0 is at position 7.

2) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit B; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 133
3) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit B.
132 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Ordering Information and Accessories
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
IPROTEC 4 Input/Output Unit with Local Control Order No. 6MD63

_ _ AA0
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device rear, Port C)

No DIGSI 4 Interface at the back 0
DIGSI 4, Modem, Electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-box4), Electrical RS458 2
DIGSI 4, Modem, RTD-box4, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector5) 3
Measuring
without measuring values 0
Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values (Only available if 1 or 5 is at position 7) 2
Comment:
1) if the optical
interface is required you must order the following: 11th digit = 4 (RS485)
and in addition:
for single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK15023AB10
for double ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK15024AB10
The converter requires an operating voltage of 24 V DC. If the available operating voltage is
> 24 V DC the additional power supply 7XV58100BA00 is required.
4) RTD-box 7XV5662*AD10 (see also Section A.1.3 Accessories).
5)
if you want to run the RTD-box at an optical interface, you need also the
RS485FOconverter 7XV56500*A00 (see Accessories at A.1.3).
6MD63 Manual 133

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.1.2 Ordering Information 6MD63 V4.2 (releases to date until .../DD)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SIPROTEC 4 Input/Output Unit with Local Control Order No. 6MD63 _ _ AA0
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs, Measuring Transducer Inputs
Housing 1/2 19, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact 3
Housing 1/2 19, 20 BI, 6 BO, 2 MT, 2 High-duty relays (4 Contacts) 1 Live Status Contact1) 41)
Housing 1/1 19, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 MT, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact 6
Housing 1/2 19, 33 BI, 9 BO, 4 High-duty relays (8 Contacts), 1 Live Status Contact1) 71)
Nominal Current
No analog inputs 0
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5
Power Supply, Binary Input Pickup Threshold Setting
110 to 250 VDC, 115 VAC, Binary Input Threshold 88 VDC 5
Construction
Surface-mounting case, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel A
Surface-mounting case for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom B
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals (ring lugs), detached operator panel C
Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting case for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) E
Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language can be changed) A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language can be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language Americal English (Language can be changed) C
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, Language German (Language cannot be changed) M
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Language English (Language cannot be changed) N
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, Language Americal English (Language cannot be changed) P
System Interface - Rear Ports
No system interface 0
IEC-Protocol, Optical, 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 4
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Single Ring, ST-Connector1) 51)
Profibus FMS Slave, Optical, Double Ring, ST-Connector 1) 61)
For further interface options see Additional Information L 9
See page 135
11
Additional Information L + L
System Interfaces (device rear)
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 0 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, Optical Double Ring, STConnector1) 0 B1)
Modbus RS485) 0 D
Modbus, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) 0 E2)
DNP3.0, RS485 0 G
DNP3.0, 820 nm, Optical, STConnector2) 0 H2)
1) not for B at position 9; if the optical interface is required, see the comment on page 135
2) cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit B.
134 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SIPROTEC 4 Input/Output Unit with Local Control Order No. 6MDJ63

_ _ AA0
DIGSI 4/Modem Interface (Device rear)
No DIGSI 4 Interface at the back 0
DIGSI 4, Electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, Electrical RS458 2
DIGSI 4, Optical 820 nm, ST-Connector 3
Measuring
without measuring values 0
Slave pointer, Average values, Min/Max values (Only available if 1 or 5 is at position 7) 2
Comment
1) if the optical interface is required you must order the following: 11th digit = 4 (RS485)
and in addition:
for single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK15023AB10
for double ring:SIEMENS OLM6GK15024AB10
The converter requires an operating voltage of 24 V DC. If the available operating voltage is
> 24 V DC the additional power supply 7XV58100BA00 is required.
6MD63 Manual 135

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.1.3 Accessories
Interface Exchange interface modules

Modules
Name Order No.
RS232 C53207A351D6411
RS485 C53207A351D6421
Optical 820 nm C53207A351D6431
Profibus FMS RS485 C53207A351D6031
Profibus FMS double ring C53207A351D6061
Profibus FMS single ring C53207A351D6091
Profibus DP RS485 C53207A351D6111
Profibus DP double ring C53207A351D6131
Modbus RS485 C53207A351D6211
Modbus 820 nm C53207A351D6231
DNP 3.0 RS485 C53207A351D6311
DNP 3.0 820 nm C53207A351D6331
RTD-Box For up to 6 temperature measuring points (at most 2 devices can be connected to
6MD63)
Name Order No.
Thermobox, UN = 24 to 60 V AC/DC 7XV56622AD100000
Thermobox, UN = 90 to 240 V AC/DC 7XV56625AD100000
RS485/Fibre Optic
Converter
RS485/Fibre Optic Converter Order No.
820 nm; FCConnector 7XV56500AA00
820 nm; STConnector 7XV56500BA00
Terminal Block
Covering Caps
Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18-terminal voltage, 12-terminal current block C73334-A1-C31-1
12-terminal voltage, 8-terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short Circuit Links
Short circuit links for terminal type Order No.

Voltage terminal, 18-terminal, or 12-terminal C73334-A1-C34-1
Current terminal,12-terminal, or 8-terminal C73334-A1-C33-1
136 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Female Plugs
Connector Type Order No.

2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Rail for

19"-Racks
Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-3
Battery
Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No

VARTA 6127 101 501
Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the
operating software DIGSI 4.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.

Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4
Operating Software Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC 4 devices

DIGSI 4
Operating Software DIGSI 4 Order No.
DIGSI 4, basic version with license for 10 7XS5400-0AA00

computers
DIGSI 4, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA0
Graphical Analysis Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option
Program SIGRA package of the complete version of DIGSI 4
Graphical analysis program SIGRA Order No.

Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5410-0AA0
Display Editor Software for creating basic and power system control pictures. Option package
of the complete version of DIGSI 4
Display Editor 4 Order No.

6MD63 Manual 137

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
Graphic Tools Graphical Software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone dia-
grams for overcurrent and distance protective devices. Option package of the com-
plete version of DIGSI 4.
Graphic Tools 4 Order No.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
connector) using DIGSI 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Order No.

SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for configuration of control interlocking conditions or creating addi-
tional logic functions in SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete ver-
sion of DIGSI 4.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Order No.

138 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
A.2 Elementary Diagrams
A.2.1 Housing for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation
6MD631D/E
Q1 F6
IA BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 F5
IB
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 F7
IC
Q6
Q7 I4
Q8
R14
Va
R16
Vb
R15
R17
Vc/VG
R18
F10 BI1 R1
F11 BO11
BI2 R2
F12 BO12
BI3 R3
F13 BO13
BI4 R4
F15 BI5 R5
F16 BI6 BO14
R6
F14
R7
BO15 R8
F17 BI7
F18 1)
Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
contact F4 23 NC
Jumper1) (NO, NC)
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2 and 3-14 in Subsection 3.2.1
Assignment of Pins of Inter-
Rear SCADA
B
faces, refer to Table 3-13
Port
Rear Service
Port C
Time
Synchronization A
R9 BI21
R10 BI22 Front PC Port
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Interference suppression
capacitors at the
Ground at Back
relay contacts,
Wall of Housing
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-1 General diagram 6MD631D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle installation)
6MD63 Manual 139

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD632D/E
Q1 F6
IA BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 F5
IB
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 F7
IC
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 BO13 R3
F18 R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 R6
BI9
K3 R7
BI10 BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
K7 Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
BI13 contact 1
K8 BI14
F4 23 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10 supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
and 3-14 in Subsection 3.2.1
K12 BI18
K13 Rear SCADA

BI19 Port B
K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service
K16 Port C
R9 BI21
R10 Time
BI22 Synchronization A
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13 Front PC Port
Ground at Back Interference suppression

Wall of Housing capacitors at the
relay contacts,
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
140 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD633D/E
Q1 F6
IA BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 F5
IB
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 F7
IC
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
I4 *) J3
Q8 BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BO8 J9
BI2
F12 BO9
BI3 J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
BO12
F17 BI7 R3
BO13
F18 R4
K1 R5
BI8 BO14
K2 R6
BI9
K3 R7
BI10 BO15
K4 R8
BI11
K6 1)
BI12 Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
K7 BI13 contact 1 F4 23 NC
K8 BI14 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power (~ )
F1
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
K12 BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 Port B

K14
Port C
K16
(+) R9
Transducer 1 Time
() R10 Synchronization A
(+) R11
Transducer 2
() R12 Front PC Port
Ground at Back Interference suppression

Wall of Housing capacitors at the
relay contacts,
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 141

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD634D/E
F6
BO1
F8
BO2
F5
F9
BO3
F7
J1 ()
J2 (+)
*) J3
BO4
J4
BO5
K18
BO6
K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BO8 J9
BI2
F12 BO9
BI3 J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14
F17 BI7
F18
K1 BI8
K2 BI9
K3 BI10
K4 BI11
K6 1)
K7 BI13 contact F4 23 NC
K8 BI14 Jumper1) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15
K5 +
Power (~ )
F1
K10 BI16 -
supply F2
K11 BI17
K12
BI18
K13 BI19 System

K14 Interface B
K15 BI20
K16 Rear Service/
DIGSI Port C
Time
Synchronization A
Front DIGSI
Port
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
142 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD635D/E
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15 R8
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 BO17
L4 *)High-duty relays
K10 Interference suppression
BI16 M18 capacitors
K11 BO18
BI17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
R9 BO22
BI21 L12
R10 BI22 1) Jumper: 12 NO
R11 BI23 Live status F3
R12 BI24 contact 1 F4 23 NC
R13 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power (~ )
F1
M2 BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4 BI28
of Interfaces, refer to
Table 3-13 and 3-14
M6 Rear SCADA
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI29 B
M7 Port
BI30
M8 BI31
M9 BI32 Rear Service
Port C
M5
M10 BI33 Time
M11 BI34 Synchronization A
M12 BI35
M13 BI36 Front PC Port
M14
M15 BI37 capacitors at the
M16 Ground at Back relay contacts,
Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 143

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD636D/E
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
L4
*) High-duty relays
K5 BO17 Interference suppression
K10 BI16 M18 capacitors
K11 BO18 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20
L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
(+) R9 BO22
L12
Transducer 1
() R10
1)
(+) R11 Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
Transducer 2 contact 1 F4
() R12
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
23 NC
M1 BI25 +
F1
M2 Power (~ )
BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4 BI28
Table 3-13 and 3-14
M6 Rear SCADA
Assignment of Pins
BI29
in Subsection 3.2.1
M7 B
BI30 Port
M8 BI31
M5 Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
BI34 A
M12 Synchronization
BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Front PC Port
M16 Ground at Back relay contacts,
144 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD637D/E
F6
BO1
F8
BO2
F5
F9
BO3
F7
J1 ()
J2 (+)
*) J3
BO4
F10 BI1 J4
F11 BO5
BI2
F12 BI3 K18
BO6
F13 BI4
F15 K17
BI5 BO7
F16 BI6
F14 J7
BO8 J9
F17 BO9
BI7 J8
F18 J11
BO10
K1 BI8 J12
K2 BI9
K3 BI10
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15
K5 L4
BO17
K10 BI16 M18
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
BO19
K13 BI19
K14 L7
BO20
L9
K15 BI20 BO21
L8
K16
L11
BO22
L12
1)
contact F4 23 NC
Jumper1) (NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power F1
(~ )
M2 BI26 -
supply F2
M3 BI27
M4 BI28
13 and 3-14 in Subsection
terfaces, refer to Table 3-
Assignment of Pins of In-
M6 BI29 System
M7 Interface B
BI30
M8 BI31
M9 BI32 Rear Service/
M5 DIGSI Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35 Interference suppression
3.2.1
M14 Front DIGSI

Port relay contacts,
M15 BI37 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
M16 Ground at Back
Wall of Housing *)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 145

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.2.2 Housing for panel surface mounting
6MD631B
25 76
IA BO1
50 77
BO2
24 51
IB
49 53
BO3
23 52
IC
48
22
I4
47
21 Va
20
Vb
46
19
Vc/VG
44
55 BI1
80 BI2
56 BI3
81 BI4
82 BI5
58 BI6
57 100
BO11
75
83 BO12
BI7 99
59 BO13
74
98
BO14
73
97
BO15 72
1) Jumper: 12 NO
Live status 54
contact 1 79 23 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
+
Power 15 L+ (V+)
(~ )
supply - 16 L (V)
Assignment of Pins
Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
96 BI21 Table 3-13 in Sub-
71 BI22 section 3.2.1
95 BI23
70 BI24
94
capacitors at the
Ground at Side relay contacts,
Figure A-8 General diagram 6MD631B (panel surface mounting)
For connections of the further interfaces, see figures A-13 or A-14.
146 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD632B
25 76
IA BO1
50 77
BO2
24 51
IB
49 53
BO3
23 52
IC
48 11 ()
22 36 (+)
47
I4 *) 10
BO4
21
Va 35
20 BO5
Vb
46 12
BO6
19
Vc/VG 37
44 BO7
55 BI1 14
80 BI2 BO8 39
56 BI3 BO9 40
81 BI4 13
82 BI5 BO10 38
58 BI6
57 100
BO11
75
83 BO12
BI7 99
59 BO13
74
84 BI8 98
BO14
60 73
BI9
85 97
BI10 BO15
61 BI11 72
62 BI12 1)
87 BI13 Live status 54 Jumper: 12 NO
63 contact 1 79 23 NC
BI14 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
88 BI15
86 +
15 L+ (V+)
Power (~ )
64 BI16 supply - 16 L (V)
89 BI17
65 BI18
90 BI19
66 Assignment of Pins
Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
91 BI20
67 Table 3-13 in Sub-
96
section 3.2.1
BI21
71 BI22
95 BI23
70 Interference suppression
BI24 capacitors at the
94
relay contacts,
Ground at Side
Wall of Housing *)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
For connections of the further interfaces see figures A-13 or A-14 .
6MD63 Manual 147

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD633B
25 76
IA BO1
50 77
BO2
24 51
IB
49 53
BO3
23 52
IC
48 11 ()
22 36 (+)
47
I4 *) 10
BO4
21
Va 35
20 BO5
Vb
46 12
BO6
19 Vc/VG 37
44 BO7
55 BI1 14
80 BI2 BO8 39
56 BI3 BO9 40
81 BI4 13
82 BI5 BO10 38
58 BI6
57 100
BO11
75
83 BO12
BI7 99
59 BO13
74
84 BI8 98
BO14
60 73
BI9
85 97
BI10 BO15
61 BI11 72
62 BI12 1)
87 BI13 Live status 54 Jumper: 12 NO
63 contact 1 79 23 NC
88 BI15
86 +
Power (~ )
15 L+ (V+)
64 BI16 -
supply 16 L (V)
89 BI17
65 BI18
90 BI19
91 BI20 Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
67 Table 3-13 in Sub-
(+) 96 section 3.2.1
() 71 Transducer 1
(+) 95
() 70 Transducer 2
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Ground at Side Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Wall of Housing
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
For connections of the further interfaces see figures A-13 or A-14.
148 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD634B
76
BO1
77
BO2
51
53
BO3
52
11 ()
36 (+)
*) 10
BO4
35
55 BI1 BO5
80 BI2 12
56 BO6
BI3
81 BI4 37
82 BO7
BI5
58 BI6 14
BO8 39
57
BO9
40
83 BI7 13
59 BO10
38
84 BI8
60 BI9
85 BI10
61 BI11
62 BI12
87 BI13
63 BI14
88 BI15
86
64 BI16
89 BI17 1)
65 Live status 54 Jumper: 12 NO
BI18 contact 1
90 79 23 NC
66
+
91 BI20 Power (~ )
L+ (V+)
67 supply - L (V)
Assignment of Pins
Front DIGSI of Interfaces, refer
Port
to Table 3-13 in
Subsection 3.2.1
Ground at Side capacitors at the
Wall of Housing relay contacts,
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 149

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD637B
76
BO1
77
BO2
51
53
BO3
52
11 ()
36 (+)
*) 10
BO4
35
BO5
12
BO6
55 BI1 37
80 BO7
BI2
56 BI3 14
81 BO8 39
BI4
82 BO9
BI5 40
58 BI6 13
57 BO10
38
83 BI7
59
21 ()
84 46 (+)
60
BI8 *) 20
85
BI9 BO16 *)
BI10 High-duty relays
61 BI11 45 Interference suppression
BO17
62 BI12 capacitors
87 22
BI13 BO18 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
63 BI14 47
88 BI15 BO19
86
BO20 25
64 BI16 50
BO21
89 BI17 24
65 BI18 23
90 BI19 BO22 48
66
91 BI20
67 1)
Live status 54 Jumper: 12 NO
contact 1 79 23 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
+
Power L+ (V+)
(~ )
supply - L (V)
92 BI25
68 BI26
93 BI27
BI28 Front DIGSI
70 BI29 of Interfaces, refer
95 Port
BI30 to Table 3-13 in
71 BI31 Subsection 3.2.1
96 BI32
94
BI33 capacitors at the
97 BI34
73 relay contacts,
BI35 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
98 BI36
74
Ground at Side
99 BI37 Wall of Housing
75
150 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD631/2/3/4/7-B
(up to release ... /DD)
Channel B
Profibus
RS232 RS485
4 CTS B
Optical 5 RTS
Rear SCADA
Port or 6 GND GND
Electrical 7 TxD A
8 RxD
9 Shield
Channel C
RS232 RS485
29 CTS B
Optical 30 RTS
Rear Service
Port or 31 GND GND
Electrical 32 TxD A
33 RxD
34 Shield
27 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
Synchronization 28 IN 5 V
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-13 General diagram 6MD631/2/3/4/7B up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting)
6MD63 Manual 151

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD631/2/3/4/7B
(beginning with
release ... /EE)
Rear SCADA Optical

Port or Channel B
Electrical elektrical RS232/RS485
Assignment of Pins
of Interface, refer to
Table 3-13 in Sub-
section 3.2.1
Rear Optical
Service Port or Channel C
27 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-14 Connection Diagram For 6MD631/2/3/4/7B beginning with release /EE
(Panel Surface Mounted)
152 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD635B
50 IA 151
BO1
100 152
BO2
49 IB 101
99 103
BO3
48 IC 102
98 19 ()
47 69 (+)
97
I4 *) 18
BO4
46
Va 68
45 BO5
Vb
96 20
BO6
44 Vc/VG
94 70
BO7
105 BI1 23
155 BI2 BO8 73
106 BI3 BO9
74
156 BI4
157 22
BI5 BO10
108 72
BI6
107 200
BO11
150
158 BO12
BI7 199
109 BO13
149
169 BI8 198
BO14
120 BI9 148
170 BI10 197
BO15
121 BI11 147
122 BI12 27 ()
172 77 (+)
123
BI13 *) 26
BI14 BO16
173
171
BI15
76 *)
BO17 High-duty relays
BI16 28 capacitors
174 BO18
BI17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
125 BI18 78
175 BO19
BI19
126 31
BO20 81
176 BI20 BO21
127 30
29
196 BO22
BI21 79
146 BI22 1)
195 Live status 104 Jumper: 12 NO
BI23
145 contact 1 154 23 NC
194
177 +
BI25 Power (~ )
37 L+ (V+)
128 BI26 supply -
178 38 L (V)
BI27
129 BI28
BI29
180 Front PC Port of Interface, refer to
BI30
131 BI31 Table 3-13 in Sub-
181 BI32 section 3.2.1
179
132 BI33 Interference suppression
182 BI34 capacitors at the
133 BI35 relay contacts,
183 BI36 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
134
Ground at Side
135
6MD63 Manual 153

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD636B
50 IA 151
BO1
100 152
BO2
49 IB 101
99 103
BO3
48 IC 102
98 19 ()
47 69 (+)
97
I4 *) 18
BO4
46 Va 68
45 BO5
Vb
96 20
BO6
44 Vc/VG
94 70
BO7
105 BI1 23
155 BI2 BO8 73
106 BI3 BO9
74
156 BI4
157 22
BI5 BO10
108 72
BI6
107 200
BO11
150
158 BO12
BI7 199
109 BO13
149
169 BI8 198
BO14
120 BI9 148
170 BI10 197
BO15
121 BI11 147
122 BI12 27 ()
172 77 (+)
123
BI13 *) 26
BI14 BO16
173 BI15
171 76 *)
BO17
High-duty relays
124 BI16 28 Interference suppression
174 BO18
BI17 capacitors
125 BI18 78 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
175 BO19
BI19
126 31
BO20 81
176 BI20 BO21
30
127
29
BO22
(+) 196 79
Transducer 1
() 146 1)
Live status 104 Jumper: 12 NO
(+) 195 contact 1
Transducer 2 154 23 NC
() 145 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
177 BI25 +
Power (~ )
37 L+ (V+)
128 BI26 supply - 38 L (V)
178 BI27
129 BI28
130 BI29 Assignment of Pins
180 BI30 of Interface, refer to
131 Front PC Port
BI31 Table 3-13 in Sub-
181 BI32
179 section 3.2.1
132 BI33
182 BI34 Interference suppression
133 BI35 capacitors at the
183 BI36 relay contacts,
134 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Ground at Side
135
154 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD635/6B
(up to release ... /DD)
Channel B
Profibus
RS232 RS485
4 CTS B
Optical 5 RTS
Rear SCADA
Port or 6 GND GND
Electrical 7 TxD A
8 RxD
9 Shield
Channel C
RS232 RS485
54 CTS B
Optical 55 RTS
Rear Service
Port or 56 GND GND
Electrical 57 TxD A
58 RxD
59 Shield
52 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-17 General diagram 6MD635/6B up to release .../DD (panel surface mounting)
6MD63 Manual 155

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD635/6B
(beginning with
release .../EE)
Rear SCADA Optical

Port or Channel B
Assignment of Pins
of Interface, refer to
Table 3-13 in Sub-
section 3.2.1
Rear Optical
Service Port or Channel C
52 IN 12 V
2 COMMON
Time
3 IN 24 V
1 Shield
Figure A-18 Connection Diagram For 6MD635/6B beginning with release /EE
(Panel Surface Mounted)
156 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
A.2.3 Devices With Detached Operation Unit
6MD631A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6
Q7 I4
Q8
R14
Va
R16
Vb
R15
R17
Vc/VG
R18
F10 BI1
F11 BI2
F12 BI3
F13 BI4
F15 BI5
F16 R1
BI6 BO11
F14 R2
BO12
R3
F17 BO13
BI7 R4
F18 R5
BO14
R6
R7
BO15 R8
1) Jumper: 12 NO
Live status F3
contact F4 23 NC
Jumper1) (NO, NC)
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2
Table 3-13 and 3-14
Assignment of Pins
Rear SCADA
in Subsection 3.2.1
Port B
Rear Service
iPort C
R9 BI21 Time
R10 BI22 Syncronization A
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
capacitors at the
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back relay contacts,
unit Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-19 General diagram 6MD631A/C (devices with separate operation unit)
6MD63 Manual 157

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD632A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
K7 Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
BI13 contact 1
K8 BI14
F4 23 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power (~ )
F1
K10 supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-13 and 3-14
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 B
K14 Port

K16 Port C
R9 BI21
R10 Time
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing Interference suppression
capacitors at the
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back relay contacts,
unit Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
158 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD633A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
Jumper: 12 NO
K7 Live status F3
BI13 contact 1 F4 23 NC
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-13 and 3-14
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA
K13 BI19 Port B
K14
K15 Rear Service
BI20 C
K16 Port
(+) R9
Transducer 1 Time
(+) R11
Transducer 2
() R12
Ground at Back
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
unit Wall of Housing
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 159

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD634A/C
F6
BO1
F8
BO2
F5
F9
BO3
F7
J1 ()
J2 (+)
*) J3
BO4
J4
BO5
K18
BO6
K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14
F17 BI7
F18
K1 BI8
K2 BI9
K3 BI10
K4 1)
K8 BI14
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-13 and 3-14
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 System
K13 BI19 Interface B
K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service/
DIGSI Port C
K16
Time
Synchronization A
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
capacitors at the
Front DIGSI Operation Ground at Back relay contacts,
Port unit Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
160 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD635A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15 *)
K5 L4 High-duty relays
BO17 Interference suppression
K11 BO18
BI17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
R9 BO22
BI21 L12
R10 BI22 1)
R11 BI23 Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
R13 Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power (~ )
F1
M2 BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4
Table 3-13 and 3-14
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

B
M7 BI30 Port
M8 BI31
Port C
M5
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Interference suppression
Ground at Back capacitors at the
M15 BI37 Wall of Housing relay contacts,
M16 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back

6MD63 Manual 161

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD636A/C
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15 R8
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
BI13 *)
K8 BI14 BO16
L3 *)
K9 BI15 High-duty relays
K5 L4 Interference suppression
BO17 capacitors
K10 BI16 M18 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
K11 BO18
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
(+) R9 BO22
L12
Transducer 1
() R10
1) Jumper: 12 NO
(+) R11 Live status F3
Transducer 2 contact 1 F4
() R12 23 NC
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 BI25 +
F1
M2 Power (~ )
BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4
Table 3-13 and 3-14
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

M7 Port B
BI30
M8 BI31
M5 Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14 Ground at Back Interference suppression
M15 BI37 Wall of Housing capacitors at the
M16 relay contacts,
Front PC Port Operation Ground at Back
162 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD637A/C
F6
BO1
F8
BO2
F5
F9
BO3
F7
J1 ()
J2 (+)
*) J3
BO4
J4
BO5
K18
BO6
F10 BI1 K17
F11 BI2 BO7
F12 BI3 J7
F13 BI4 BO8 J9
F15 BI5 BO9
J8
F16 BI6
F14 J11
BO10
J12
F17 BI7
F18
K1 L1 ()
BI8 L2 (+)
)
K2 BI9 * L3
K3 BI10 BO16
K4 BI11 L4
K6 BI12 BO17
K7 BI13 M18
K8 BO18
BI14
K9 BI15 M17
K5 BO19
L7
K10 BI16 BO20 L9
K11 BI17 BO21
L8
K12 BI18
K13 L11
BI19 BO22
K14 L12
K15 BI20 Live status F3 1)

Jumper: 12 NO
K16 contact 1 F4
Jumper ) (NO, NC) 23 NC
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2
M1 BI25
M2
Table 3-13 and 3-14
BI26
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M3 BI27 System
M4 Interface B
BI28
M6 BI29
M8 DIGSI Port C
BI31
M9 BI32
M5 Time
Synchronization A
M10 BI33
M11 BI34
BI35
M13 capacitors at the
BI36
M14 relay contacts,
Ground at Back Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
M15 BI37
M16 Wall of Housing
*)
High-duty relays
Front DIGSI Operation Ground at Back Interference suppression
Port unit Wall of Housing capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 163

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.2.4 Devices for panel surface mounting without Operation Unit
6MD631F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6
Q7 I4
Q8
R14
Va
R16
Vb
R15
R17
Vc/VG
R18
F10 BI1
F11 BI2
F12 BI3
F13 BI4
F15 BI5
F16 R1
BI6 BO11
F14 R2
BO12
R3
F17 BO13
BI7 R4
F18 R5
BO14
R6
R7
BO15 R8
1) Jumper: 12 NO
Live status F3
contact F4 23 NC
Jumper1) (NO, NC)
+
Power F1
(~ )
supply - F2
Table 3-13 and 3-14
Assignment of Pins
Rear SCADA
in Subsection 3.2.1
Port B
Rear Service
iPort C
R9 BI21 Time
R10 BI22 Syncronization A
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
PC Port capacitors at the
(to Panel or Door) relay contacts,
Figure A-26 General diagram 6MD631F/G (devices for panel surface mounting without operation unit)
164 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD632F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
K7 BI13
K8 contact 1 F4 23 NC
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power (~)
F1
K10 supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-13 and 3-14
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 B
K14 Port

K16 Port C
R9 BI21
R10 Time
R11 BI23
R12 BI24
R13
Ground at Back
capacitors at the
PC Port
relay contacts,
(to Panel or Door)
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 165

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD633F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 1)
Jumper: 12 NO
K7 Live status F3
BI13 contact 1 F4 23 NC
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-13 and 3-14
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 Rear SCADA

K13 BI19 Port B
K14
K15 Rear Service
BI20 C
K16 Port
(+) R9
Transducer 1 Time
(+) R11
Transducer 2
() R12
Ground at Back
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
PC Port Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
(to Panel or Door)
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
166 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD634F/G
F6
BO1
F8
BO2
F5
F9
BO3
F7
J1 ()
J2 (+)
*) J3
BO4
J4
BO5
K18
BO6
K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4 J11
F15 BI5 BO10
J12
F16 BI6
F14
F17 BI7
F18
K1 BI8
K2 BI9
K3 BI10
K4 1)
K8 BI14
K9 BI15 +
K5 Power F1
(~ )
K10
supply - F2
BI16
K11 BI17
Table 3-13 and 3-14
K12
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
BI18 System
K13 BI19 Interface B
K14
K15 BI20 Rear Service/
DIGSI Port C
K16
Time
Synchronization A
Ground at Back
Wall of Housing
capacitors at the
Front DIGSI Operation Ground at Back relay contacts,
Port unit Wall of Housing Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
*)
High-duty relays
capacitors
MP, 22 nF, 250 V
6MD63 Manual 167

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD635F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17 Vc/VG
R18 K17
BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15
K4 BI11 R8
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15 *)
BO17
K11 BO18
BI17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20
L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
R9 BO22
BI21 L12
R10 BI22
R11 1)
R13 Jumper )(NO, NC)
M1 +
BI25 Power (~ )
F1
M2 BI26 -
supply F2
M3 BI27
M4
Table 3-13 and 3-14
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

Port B
M7 BI30
M8 BI31
Port C
M5
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
Ground at Back capacitors at the
M15 BI37 relay contacts,
Wall of Housing
M16 Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
PC Port
(to Panel or Door)
168 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Elementary Diagrams
6MD636F/G
Q1 IA F6
BO1
Q2 F8
BO2
Q3 IB F5
Q4 F9
BO3
Q5 IC F7
Q6 J1 ()
Q7 J2 (+)
Q8
I4 *) J3
BO4
R14
Va J4
R16 BO5
Vb
R15 K18
BO6
R17
Vc/VG K17
R18 BO7
F10 BI1 J7
F11 BI2 BO8 J9
F12 BI3 BO9
J8
F13 BI4
F15 J11
BI5 BO10
F16 J12
BI6
F14 R1
BO11
R2
F17 BO12
BI7 R3
F18 BO13
R4
K1 BI8 R5
BO14
K2 BI9 R6
K3 BI10 R7
BO15 R8
K4 BI11
K6 BI12 L1 ()
K7 L2 (+)
K8
BI13 *) L3
BI14 BO16
K9 BI15 *)
BO17 Interference suppression
K11 BO18 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
BI17
K12 BI18 M17
K13 BO19
BI19
K14 L7
BO20 L9
K15 BI20 BO21
K16 L8
L11
(+) R9 BO22
L12
Transducer 1
() R10 1)
(+) R11 Live status F3 Jumper: 12 NO
Transducer 2 contact 1 F4 23 NC
() R12
Jumper ) (NO, NC)
M1 BI25 +
F1
M2 Power (~ )
BI26 supply -
M3 F2
BI27
M4
Table 3-13 and 3-14
BI28
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M6 BI29 Rear SCADA

M7 Port B
BI30
M8 BI31
M5 Port C
M10 BI33
M11 Time
M12 BI35
M13 BI36
M14
M15 BI37 Ground at Back capacitors at the
M16 Wall of Housing relay contacts,
PC Port
(to Panel or Door)
6MD63 Manual 169

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
6MD637F/G
F6
BO1
F8
BO2
F5
F9
BO3
F7
J1 ()
J2 (+)
*) J3
BO4
J4
BO5
K18
F10 BO6
BI1
F11 BI2 K17
F12 BO7
BI3
F13 BI4 J7
BO8 J9
F15 BI5 BO9
F16 BI6 J8
F14 J11
BO10
J12
F17 BI7
F18
L1 ()
K1 BI8 L2 (+)
K2 BI9 *) L3
K3 BI10 BO16
K4 BI11
BO17
L4 *)
K6 BI12 High-duty relays
K7 BI13 M18 Interference suppression
K8 BO18 capacitors
BI14
K9 BI15 M17 MP, 22 nF, 250 V
BO19
K5
L7
K10 BI16 BO20 L9
K11 BI17 BO21
L8
K12 BI18
K13 L11
BI19 BO22 L12
K14
K15 BI20 Live status F3 1)
Jumper: 12 NO
K16 contact 1 F4
Jumper ) (NO, NC) 23 NC
+ F1
Power (~ )
supply - F2
M1 BI25
M2
Table 3-13 and 3-14
BI26
Assignment of Pins
in Subsection 3.2.1
M3 BI27 System
M4 Interface B
BI28
M6 BI29
M8 DIGSI Port C
BI31
M9 BI32
M5 Time
Synchronization A
M10 BI33
M11 BI34
BI35
M13 capacitors at the
BI36
M14 relay contacts,
Ground at Back Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
M15 BI37
M16 Wall of Housing
PC Port
(to Panel or Door)
170 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Connection Examples
A.3 Connection Examples
A.3.1 Current and Voltage Transformer Connection Examples
Panel Surface Mounted

Flush-mounted/Cubicle
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 Q8 47
K
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 97
K Q8
6MD635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-33 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection for
ground current(Grounded-Wye Connection with residual 3I0 Neutral Current), nor-
mal circuit layout appropriate for all networks.
6MD63 Manual 171

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 47
K Q8
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k
47 Q7 I4 97
K Q8
6MD635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-34 Current connections to two current transformers - only for ungrounded or com-
pensated networks.
172 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Connection Examples

25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k
47 Q8 I4 Q7 22
K
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C
L l
K k
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!

Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 Current
Input !
Size 1/2

50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k
97 Q8 I4 Q7 47
K
6MD635/6
A B C
L l
K k
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!

Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 Current
Input !
Size 1/1
Figure A-35 Current connections to three current transformers and a core balance neutral
current transformer for ground current preferred for effectively or low-resistance
grounded networks
6MD63 Manual 173

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
a
b

21 R14 Va
Vb
46 R15 R16 20
Vc
19 R17 R18 44
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k I4
K 22 Q7 Q8 47
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
a
b
46 R14 Va
96 R15 Vb
R16 45
Vc
44 R17 R18 94
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k I4
K 47 Q7 Q8 97
6MD635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-36 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers and three voltage
transformers (phase-ground), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks.
174 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Connection Examples
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
da
dn
a
b

21 R14 Va-b
46 R15 Vc-b R16 20
44 R18 VG R17 19
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 Q8 47
K
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A
B
da
dn
a
b

46 R14 Va-b
96 R15 Vc-b
R16 45
94 R18 VG R17 44
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 Q8 97
K
6MD635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-37 Current and voltage connections to three current transformers, two voltage trans-
formers (phase-phase) and open delta VT for V4, appropriate for all networks.
6MD63 Manual 175

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A
Busbar
B
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
21 R14
Vc-b R16 20
46 R15
19 R17 R18 44
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 Q8
K 47
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
46 R14
Vc-b R16 45
96 R15
44 R17 R18 94
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 Q8
K 97
6MD635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-38 Current and voltage connections to two current transformers and two voltage
transformers, for ungrounded or compensated networks.
176 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Connection Examples
A
Busbar
B
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
21 R14
Vc-b R16 20
46 R15
19 R17 R18 44
25 Q1 Ia Q2 50
24 Q3 Ib Q4 49
23 Q5 Ic Q6 48
L
l
k 22 Q7 I4 Q8
K 47
6MD631/2/3/4/7
A B C Size 1/2
A
Busbar
B
C
A BA B
a ba b

Va-b
46 R14
Vc-b R16 45
96 R15
44 R17 R18 94
50 Q1 Ia Q2 100
49 Q3 Ib Q4 99
48 Q5 Ic Q6 98
L
l
k 47 Q7 I4 Q8
K 97
6MD635/6
A B C Size 1/1
Figure A-39 Current connections to tree current transformers and two voltage transformers,
for ungrounded or compensated networks.
6MD63 Manual 177

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.3.2 Connection Examples for RTD-box
A 7XV566
7XV5650 A A
Port C T1 FO/RS485 RTD-box
6MD63 B Bus number: 00
Converter B A and B jumpers for
the terminating resis-
B tors
A 7XV566
A A RTD-box
6MD63 Port C*) Bus number: 00
B A and B jumpers for
B the terminating resis-
B tors
Figure A-40 Simplex operation with one RTD-box

above: optical design (1 FO); below: design with RS485
A 7XV566
R1 7XV5650 A A RTD-box
6MD63 Port C T1 FO/RS485 B Bus number: 01
Converter B A and B jumpers for
tors
A 7XV566
A A RTD-box
6MD63 Port C Bus number: 01
A and B jumpers for
B B the terminating resis-
B tors
Figure A-41 Half-duplex operation with one RTD-box

above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485
R1 7XV5650 7XV566
A A
RTD-box
6MD63 Port C T1 FO/RS485 B
Converter B Busnummer: 01
A 7XV566
A RTD-box
Bus number: 02
tors
7XV566
A A RTD-box
6MD63 Port C Bus number: 01
B B
A 7XV566
A RTD-box
Bus number: 02
tors
Figure A-42 Half-duplex operation with two RTD-boxes

above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485
178 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Default Settings
A.4 Default Settings
A.4.1 LED Displays
The LED indication presettings which are preset in the device when it leaves the fac-
tory are summarised in Table A-1.
Table A-1 LED indication presettings

LED Descriptive Text Brief Text Message # Comments
LED 1 to 7 Not Configured
LED 8 Breaker OPENED Bkr OPENED Internal message made in CFC
LED 9 Cabinet door open >Door open Individual message coupled via BI
LED 10 Spring not charged >CB wait Individual message coupled via BI
LED 11 to 14 Not Configured
A.4.2 Binary Inputs
The presettings of the binary inputs are listed (dependent on the ordering variant) in
Tables A-2 to A-4.
Positions that are not indicated in the following tables have no presetting.
Table A-2 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Input LCD Text Function No. Remarks

BI1 ------------------ ------------- Not Configured
BI2 >Reset LED 0005 Reset of LED indicators,
Hactive
BI3 >Light on ---- Switch on light for device display,
Hactive
BI4 >52-b 4602 Circuit breaker open, Hactive
BI5 >52-a 4601 Circuit breaker closed,
Hactive
BI6 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BI7 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
Table A-3 Further binary input presettings for 6MD631*

BI 21 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
6MD63 Manual 179

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
Table A-3 Further binary input presettings for 6MD631*

BI 22 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BI 23 >CB ready ---- Spring charged
BI 24 >DoorClose ---- Door closed
Table A-4 Further binary input presettings for 6MD632*, 6MD633*, 6MD634* ,
6MD635*, 6MD636* and 6MD637*

BI 8 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BI 9 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BI 11 >CB ready ---- Spring charged
BI 12 >DoorClose ---- Door closed
(further) no presetting
A.4.3 Binary Outputs
The presettings of the binary outputs are listed (dependent on the ordering variant) in
Tables A-5 to A-7.
Positions that are not indicated in the following tables have no presetting.
Table A-5 Binary Output presetting for all devices and ordering variants
Binary LCD Text Function Remarks

Output No.
BO1 52Breaker OPEN ---- Breaker OPEN
BO2 52Breaker CLOSE ---- Breaker CLOSE
BO3 52Breaker CLOSE ---- Breaker CLOSE
Tabelle A-6 Further binary output presettings for 6MD631*, 6MD632*, 6MD633* ,
6MD635* and 6MD636*

Output No.
BO11 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BO12 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BO13 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BO14 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
180 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Default Settings
Tabelle A-7 Further binary output presettings for 6MD634* and 6MD637*

Output No.
BO7 GndSwit. OPEN ---- Ground switch open
BO8 GndSwit. CLOSE ---- Ground switch closed
BO9 Disc.Swit. OPEN ---- Disconnector switch open
BO10 Disc.Swit. CLOSE ---- Disconnector switch closed
A.4.4 Function Keys
Applies for all devices and ordered variants:
Function Keys Presetting
F1 Display of operational indications
F2 Display of the primary operational measured values
F3 No presetting
F4 No presetting
6MD63 Manual 181

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
Standard Default
Display of the [%] IL ULE ULL
Graphic Display L1 0.0 0.0 0.0
L2 0.0 0.0 0.0
L3 0.0 0.0 0.0
I U
12 0kV
23 0kV
31 0kV
L1 0A 0kV
L2 0A 0kV
L3 0A 0kV
E 0A 0kV
I-MIN I-MAX
L1 0A 0A
L2 0A 0A
L3 0A 0A
S: 0.0MVA
P: 0.0MW
Q: 0.0MVAR
F: ---
cos: ---
Figure A-43 Default display
182 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Default Settings
A.4.5 Pre-Defined CFC Charts
Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC device.
Depending on the variant the following charts may be implemented:
Device and System The NEGATOR block assigns the input signal DataStop directly to an output. This is
Logic not directly possible without the interconnection of this block.
IN: Device, General OUT: Control Device UnblockDT IntSP

>DataStop SP
OUT: Device, General Feeder gnd IntSP

IN: Control Device
GndSwit. DP
Figure A-44 Device and System Logic
Transducer For devices with integrated measurement transducers, a zero suppression and a limit
20 mA Input value monitor for the signals supplied by two measurement transducers for pressure
and temperature are shown as examples of measured value processing:
IN: Set points Press< LVU OUT: Measurement Superv.

Pressure OUT
IN: Measurement Td1= MV OUT: Set points SP.
Pressure OUT
OUT: Measurement .
Press= MVU
IN: Set points Temp> LVU 1

IN: Measurement Td2= MV OUT: Set points SP.
Temp.> OUT
OUT: Measurement Superv.
Temp. OUT
OUT: Measurement Temp=MVU
Figure A-45 Processing of the signals supplied by measurement modifiers for pressure and temperature
6MD63 Manual 183

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
Interlocking Standard Interlocking for three switching devices
Worksheet 1:
Interlocking .15 X1
IN: Control Device 52Breaker DP Interlocking .14 X1
Interlocking .13 X1
IN: Control Device 52Breaker DP
Interlocking .15 X2
IN: Control Device Disc.Swit. DP
IN: Control Device Disc.Swit. DP Interlocking .14 X2

Interlocking .13 X3
IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP
Interlocking .15 X3
Interlocking .14 X3
IN: Control Device GndSwit. DP
OUT: Control Device 52 Close
IN: Process Data >CB ready SP IntSP
IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP
Worksheet 2 (continuation of Worksheet 1):
IN: Process Data >DoorClose SP OUT:Control Device 52 Open IntSP
Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation OUT:Control Device Disc.Close IntSP

Interlocking. 8 Y
Interlocking. 5 Y Annunciation
Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation OUT:Control Device Disc.Open IntSP

Interlocking. 8 Y
Interlocking. 10 Y
Interlocking. 1 Y Annunciation OUT: Control Device GndSw Cl. IntSP

Interlocking. 3 Y Annunciation OUT: Control Device GndSw Open IntSP
Interlocking. 10 Y
Figure A-46 Standard Interlocking For Circuit Breaker, Disconnector and Ground Switch
184 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Default Settings
Set points Using modules on the running sequence measured value processing, a low current
monitor for the three phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high
as soon as one of the three phase currents falls below the set threshold:
IN: Set points 37-1 LV

IN: Measurement Ia = MV
OUT: Set points SP. 37-1

IN: Set points 37-1 LV alarm OUT
IN: Measurement Ib = MV
IN: Set points 37-1 LV

IN: Measurement Ic = MV
Figure A-47 Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37-1)
Blocks of the task level MW_BEARB (measured value processing) are used to im-
plement the overcurrent monitoring and the power monitoring.
IN: Set points I Admd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I A dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter Ia dmd= MV
IN: Set points I Bdmd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I B dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter Ib dmd= MV
IN: Set points I Cdmd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I C dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter Ic dmd= MV
IN: Set points I1dmd> LV OUT: Set points SP. I1 dmd> OUT
IN: Demand meter I1 dmd= MV
Figure A-48 Overcurrent monitoring
6MD63 Manual 185

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
IN: Set points |Pdmd|> LV OUT: Set points SP.

|Pdmd|> OUT
IN: Demand meter P dmd = MV
IN: Set points |Qdmd|> LV

OUT: Set points SP.
|Qdmd|> OUT
IN: Demand meter Q dmd = MV
OUT: Set points SP.

IN: Set points |Sdmd|> LV
|Sdmd|> OUT
IN: Demand meter S dmd = MV
IN: Set points |PF|< LU

OUT: Set points SP.
PF(55)alarm OUT
IN: Measurement PF = MV
Figure A-49 Power monitoring
186 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Interoperability List
A.5 Interoperability List
1. Physical layer
1.1 Electrical interface
X EIA RS-485 X Number of loads for one equipment: 32
1.2 Optical interface
X Glass fibre F-SMA type connector
X Plastic fibre X BFOC/2,5 type connector
1.3 Transmission speed
X 9600 bit/s X 19200 bit/s
2. Link layer
There are no choices for the link layer
3. Application layer
3.1 Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in 4.10 of
IEC 60870-5-4
3.2 Common address of ASDU
X One common address of ADSU More than one common address of ASDU
(identical with station address)
3.3 Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction
3.3.1 System functions in monitor direction
X 0 End of general interrogation X 0 Time synchronization
X 2 Reset FCB X 3 Reset CU
X 4 Start/restart X 5 Power on
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4 see separate table in the device manual (Information List in the following section)
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7 Measurands in monitor direction

144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I, V
146 Measurand I, V, P, Q X 147 Measurands IN, VEN
148 Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
3.3.8 Generic functions in monitor direction

240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 End of general interrogation generic 249 Write entry with confirmation
data
250 Write entry with execution 251 Write entry aborted
3.4 Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
3.4.1 System functions in control direction
X 0 Initiation of general interrogation X 0 Time synchronization
3.4.2 General commands in control direction
16 Auto-recloser on / off 17 Teleprotection on / off
18 Protection on / off X 19 LED reset
6MD63 Manual 187

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
23 Activate characteristic 1 24 Activate characteristic 2

25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4
3.4.3 Generic functions in control direction

240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry
249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entry with execution
251 Write entry abort
3.5 Basic application functions
X Test mode X Blocking of monitor direction
X Disturbance data Generic services
X Private data
3.6 Miscellaneous
Measurand max. value = rated value x

1.2 2.4
Current L1 X
Current L2 X
Current L3 X
Voltage L1-E X
Voltage L2-E X
Voltage L3-E X
Voltage L1-L2
Active power P X
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
188 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Protocol-dependent functions
A.6 Protocol-dependent functions
Protocol IEC 608705103 Profibus FMS Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus ASCII/ Additional
RTU interface
Function
(optional)
Operational mea- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

sured values
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes Yes No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- Yes
tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter-
face face face
Remote relay setting No. Only via addi- Yes No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- Yes
tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter-
face face face face
User-defined mes- Yes Yes Pre-defined User- Pre-defined User- Pre-defined User- Yes
sages and switching defined messag- defined messag- defined messages
objects es in CFC es in CFC in CFC
Time synchronization Via protocol; Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B;
DCF77/IRIG B; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface;
Interface; Interface; Binary input Interface; Binary input
Binary input Binary input Binary input
Messages with time Yes Yes No Yes No Yes

stamp
Commissioning aids
Measured value Yes Yes No No No Yes
indication block-
ing
Creating test mes- Yes Yes No No No Yes
sages
Physical mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous
Transmission mode Cyclically/Event Cyclically/ Cyclically Cyclically/Event Cyclically

Event
Baudrate 4800 to 38400 Up to 1.5 Up to 1.5 MBaud 4800 to 19200 2400 to 19200 4800 to
MBaud 115200
Type RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS232

RS485 Optical fibre Optical fibre Optical fibre Optical fibre RS485
Optical fibre Optical fi-
Single ring Double ring
bre
Double ring
6MD63 Manual 189

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.7 Functions Overview

190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input
Port C
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Con-
6 RTD half duplex operation operation nection Type
12 RTD half duplex operation
A.8 Settings
Note: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the devices. Depen-
dent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version. In the list
below, the setting ranges and default setting values for the pickup currents are for a device with a nominal cur-
rent rating IN = 1 A. For a nominal current rating IN = 5 A, multiply the Setting Options values and Default Setting
values by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the device with primary values.
Addresses to which the letter A is attached can only be modified by using the DIGSI 4 software at Further
Settings.
Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments

201 CT Starpoint Power System towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
Data 1 towards Busbar
202 Vnom PRIMARY Power System 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
Data 1
203 Vnom SECON- Power System 100..225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
DARY Data 1 (L-L)
204 CT PRIMARY Power System 10..50000 A 100 A CT Rated Primary Current

Data 1
205 CT SECONDARY Power System 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Cur-

Data 1 5A rent
206A Vph / Vdelta Power System 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT
Data 1 To Open-Delta-VT
209 PHASE SEQ. Power System ABC ABC Phase Sequence

Data 1 ACB
210A TMin TRIP CMD Power System 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Data 1 Duration
190 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Settings

211A TMax CLOSE CMD Power System 0.01..32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Data 1 Duration
212 BkrClosed I MIN Power System 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Cur-
Data 1 rent Threshold
213 VT Connection Power System Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection
Data 1 Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn,
VGnd
Van, Vbn, Vcn,
214 Rated Frequency Power System 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency

Data 1 60 Hz
217 Ignd-CT PRIM Power System 1..50000 A 60 A Ignd-CT rated primary cur-
Data 1 rent
218 Ignd-CT SEC Power System 1A 1A Ignd-CT rated secondary

Data 1 5A current
276 TEMP. UNIT Power System Degree Celsius Degree Celsius Unit of temparature measu-
Data 1 Degree Fahrenheit rement
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device, Gene- Display Targets on Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
ral Settings every Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on
TRIP only
611 Spont. FltDisp. Device, Gene- YES NO Spontaneous display of

ral Settings NO flt.annunciations
1101 FullScaleVolt. Power System 0.10..800.00 kV 12.00 kV Measurem:FullScaleVol-

Data 2 tage(Equipm.rating)
1102 FullScaleCurr. Power System 10..50000 A 100 A Measurem:FullScaleCur-

Data 2 rent(Equipm.rating)
8101 MEASURE. Measurement OFF ON Measurement Supervision

SUPERV Supervision ON
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT Measurement 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for

Supervision Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V Measurement 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Supervision Monitor
8104 BALANCE I LIMIT Measurement 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Threshold for

Supervision Balance Monitoring
8105 BAL. FACTOR I Measurement 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Supervision Monitor
8106 I THRESHOLD Measurement 0.05..2.00 A; 0.10 A Summated Current Monito-

Supervision ring Threshold
8107 I FACTOR Measurement 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monito-

Supervision ring Factor
6MD63 Manual 191

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

8301 DMD Interval Demand Mea- 15 Min per., 1 Sub 60 Min per., 1 Sub. Demand Calculation Inter-
surement Setup 15 Min per., 3 Subs vals
15 Min per., 15
Subs
30 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 1 Sub.
60 Min per., 10
Subs
5 Min per., 5 Subs
8302 DMD Sync.Time Demand Mea- On the Hour On the Hour Demand Synchronization
surement Setup 15 Min. after Hour Time
30 Min. after Hour
45 Min. after Hour
8311 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max Mea- NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset
surement Setup YES Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max Mea- 0..1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
surement Setup
8313 MiMa RESET- Min/Max Mea- 1..365 day(s) 7 day(s) MinMax Reset Cycle Period
CYCLE surement Setup
8314 MinMax- Min/Max Mea- 1..365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle
RES.START surement Setup in
8315 MeterResolution Energy Standard Standard Meter resolution

Resolution Factor
10
Resolution Factor
100
9011A RTD 1 TYPE RTD-Box not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Oil RTD 1: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 C; 100 C RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 F; 212 F RTD 1: Temperature Stage

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD 2: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
192 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Settings

9022A RTD 2 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD 2: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup
6MD63 Manual 193

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup
194 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Settings

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

1 Pickup

1 Pickup

2 Pickup

2 Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD10: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
6MD63 Manual 195

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

9102A RTD10 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD10: Location
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 C; 100 C RTD10: Temperature

Stage 1 Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 F; 212 F RTD10: Temperature

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
196 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Settings

Stage 2 Pickup
6MD63 Manual 197

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.9 Overview of the masking features of the user defined information
Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
Annunciation:
Single Point
SP_Ev Single Point Indication Event
SP Single Point Indication ON/OFF X X X X X X X
SP Single Point Indication Open/Close X X X X X X X
Double Point
DP Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = X X X X1) X X X2)
not valid/transmitted as 3)
DP_I Double Point Indication (Breaker indication 00 = X X X X1) X X X2)
intermediate/transmitted as 0)
Output Slow
OUT Output Indication Event
OUT Output Indication ON/OFF X X X X X1) X X X2)
OUT Output Indication Open/Close X X X X X1) X X X2)
Output Fast
OUT Protection ON/OFF X X X X X X X2)
OUT Protection Open/Close X X X X X X X2)
Tagging
IntSP_ Ev Internal Single Point Indication Event
IntSP Internal Single Point Indication ON/OFF X X X X X X 1) X X X2)
IntSP Internal Single Point Indication Open/Close X X X X X X1) X X X2)
IntDP Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication X X X1) X X X2)
00 = not valid/transmitted as 3)
IntDP_I Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication X X X1) X X X2)
00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0)
Tap Changer
TxTap Transformer Tap Changer X
Control Commands without feedback:

Single Controls
C_S ON/OFF X X X X X X
C_S Open/Close X X X X X X
Single Controls negated
1)
Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2)
Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
198 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Overview of the masking features of the user defined information
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
C_SN ON/OFF X X X X X X
C_SN Open/Close X X X X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close
C_D2 ON/OFF X X X X X X
C_D2 Open/Close X X X X X X
C_D2 Transformer Tap Changer X X X X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
Double Controls negated
C_D2N ON/OFF X X X X X X
C_D2N Open/Close X X X X X X
C_D2N Transformer Tap Changer X X X X X X
1)
Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2
) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
6MD63 Manual 199

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
Control Commands with feedback:
Single Controls
CF_S Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control X X X X X X
SP Feedback X X X X X X X X
CF_S Single Point Indication Open/Close Control X X X X X X
CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control X X X X X X
DP 00 = not valid/transmitted as 3) Feedback X X X X X X
CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control X X X X X X
DP_I 00 = intermediate/transmitted as 0) Feedback X X X X X X
CF_D2 Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control X X X X X X
CF_D2 Single Point Indication Open/Close Control X X X X X X
CF_D2 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control X X X X X X
CF_D2 Transformer Tap Changer Control X X X X X X
TxTap Feedback
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
TxTap Feedback
200 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Overview of the masking features of the user defined information
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
TxTap Feedback
TxTap Feedback
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close negated
CF_D2N Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control X X X X X X
CF_D2N Single Point Indication Open/Close Control X X X X X X
CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control X X X X X X
CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control X X X X X X
CF_D2N Transformer Tap Changer Control X X X X X X
TxTap Feedback
Measured Values:
MV Measured Value X X
MVU Measured Value, User Defined X X
LV Limit Value X X
LVU Limit Value, User Defined X X
6MD63 Manual 201

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
Metered Values:
MVMV Metered Value of Measured Values
PMV Pulse Metered Values X
202 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Information List
A.10 Information List
NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. Depen-
dent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version.
The symbol > indicates that the source of the indication is a binary input.
Indications for T103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for
IEC 60870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected
to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (".._Ev").
In columns Event Log, Trip Log and Ground Fault Log the following applies:
UPPER CASE: ON/OFF definitely set, not allocatable
lower case: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
O/O ON / OFF DP Double Point Indication

OUT Output Indication C Command without feedback
SP Single Point Indication CF Command with Feedback
IntSP Internal Single Point Indication MV Measured Value
SP_Ev Spontaneous Event LV Limit Value
F.No. Description Function Type of Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103

Informa-
tion
Ground Fault Log On/Off
Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00003 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device, General SP_Ev LED BI BO 135 48 1 GI
Clock (>Time Synch) Settings
00005 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device, General SP LED BI BO 135 50 1 GI

Settings
00015 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device, General SP LED BI BO 135 53 1 GI

Settings
00016 >Stop data transmission Device, General SP LED BI BO 135 54 1 GI

(>DataStop) Settings
00051 Device is Operational and Protec- Device, General OUT ON LED BO 135 81 1 GI
ting (Device OK) Settings OFF
00052 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Device, General IntSP ON LED BO 160 18 1 GI

Active (ProtActive) Settings OFF
00055 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device, General OUT ON

Settings
6MD63 Manual 203

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00056 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 5 1
Settings
00060 Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, General OUT_Ev ON LED BO 160 19 1
Settings
00067 Resume (Resume) Device, General OUT on * LED BO

Settings
00068 Clock Synchronization Error Device, General OUT on LED BO

(Clock SyncError) Settings off
00069 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightS- Device, General OUT ON LED BO

avTime) Settings OFF
00070 Setting calculation is running Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 22 1 GI

(Settings Calc.) Settings OFF
00071 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device, General OUT LED BO

Settings
00072 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00073 Local setting change (Local Device, General OUT

change) Settings
00110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device, General OUT_Ev ON LED BO 135 130 1
Settings
00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device, General OUT ON M LED BO 135 136 1 GI
Settings
00125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, General OUT ON LED BO 135 145 1 GI
Settings OFF
00126 Protection ON/OFF (via system Power System IntSP ON LED BO

port) (ProtON/OFF) Data 2 OFF
00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 47 1 GI
Sum Alarm) Settings OFF
00144 Error 5V (Error 5V) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00145 Error 0V (Error 0V) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00146 Error -5V (Error -5V) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00147 Error Power Supply (Error Pwr- Device, General OUT ON LED BO
Supply) Settings OFF
00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Device, General OUT ON LED BO 160 46 1 GI
Sum Event) Settings OFF
00161 Failure: General Current Supervi- Measurement OUT ON LED BO 160 32 1 GI

sion (Fail I Superv.) Supervision OFF
00162 Failure: Current Summation Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 182 1 GI

(Failure I) Supervision OFF
204 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Information List

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 183 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
00167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail V Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 186 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
00171 Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Measurement OUT ON LED BO 160 35 1 GI

Ph. Seq.) Supervision OFF
00175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 191 1 GI
(Fail Ph. Seq. I) Supervision OFF
00176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 192 1 GI
(Fail Ph. Seq. V) Supervision OFF
00177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Bat- Device, General OUT ON LED BO
tery) Settings OFF
00178 I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board error) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF
00183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device, General OUT ON LED BO

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF

Settings OFF
00197 Measurement Supervision is swit- Measurement OUT ON LED BO 135 197 1 GI

ched OFF (MeasSup OFF) Supervision OFF
00264 Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD- RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

Box 1) OFF
00267 Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD- RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

Box 2) OFF
00268 Supervision Pressure Measurement OUT on LED BO

(Superv.Pressure) off
00269 Supervision Temperature Measurement OUT on LED BO

(Superv.Temp.) off
00270 Set Point Pressure< (SP. Pres- Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO
sure<) sured Values) off
00271 Set Point Temp> (SP. Temp>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO
sured Values) off
6MD63 Manual 205

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00272 Set Point Operating Hours (SP. Set Points (Stati- OUT on LED BO 135 229 1 GI
Op Hours>) stic) off
00273 Set Point Phase A dmd> (SP. I A Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 230 1 GI
dmd>) sured Values) off
00274 Set Point Phase B dmd> (SP. I B Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 234 1 GI
00275 Set Point Phase C dmd> (SP. I C Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 235 1 GI
00276 Set Point positive sequence Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 236 1 GI
I1dmd> (SP. I1dmd>) sured Values) off
00277 Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. |Pdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 237 1 GI
sured Values) off
00278 Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. |Qdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 238 1 GI
sured Values) off
00279 Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. |Sdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 239 1 GI
sured Values) off
00284 Set Point 37-1 Undercurrent Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 244 1 GI
alarm (SP. 37-1 alarm) sured Values) off
00285 Set Point 55 Power factor alarm Set Points (Mea- OUT on LED BO 135 245 1 GI
(SP. PF(55)alarm) sured Values) off
00301 Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Device, General OUT ON ON 135 231 2 GI
Settings OFF OFF
00302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Device, General OUT ON 135 232 2 GI
Settings
00303 sensitive Ground fault (sens Gnd Device, General OUT ON ON 135 233 1 GI
flt) Settings OFF
00356 >Manual close signal (>Manual Power System SP LED BI BO 150 6 1 GI

Close) Data 2
00395 >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I Min- Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

Max Reset) ment Setup
00396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

MiMaReset) ment Setup
00397 >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

MiMaReset) ment Setup
00398 >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

(>VphphMiMaRes) ment Setup
00399 >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>V1 Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

MiMa Reset) ment Setup
00400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

00401 >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>S Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

206 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Information List

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO
00403 >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

(>Idmd MiMaReset) ment Setup
00404 >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

(>Pdmd MiMaReset) ment Setup
00405 >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

(>Qdmd MiMaReset) ment Setup
00406 >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

(>Sdmd MiMaReset) ment Setup
00407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

(>Frq MiMa Reset) ment Setup
00408 >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max Measure- SP ON BI BO

Reset (>PF MiMaReset) ment Setup
00409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Statistics SP on LED BI BO

Op Count) off
01020 Counter of operating hours Statistics OUT

(Op.Hours=)
01021 Accumulation of interrupted cur- Statistics OUT

rent Ph A ( Ia =)

rent Ph B ( Ib =)

rent Ph C ( Ic =)
04601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is Power System SP LED BI BO

open) (>52-a) Data 2
04602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is clo- Power System SP LED BI BO

sed) (>52-b) Data 2
05145 >Reverse Phase Rotation Power System SP ON LED BI BO

(>Reverse Rot.) Data 1 OFF
05147 Phase rotation ABC (Rotation Power System OUT ON LED BO 70 128 1 GI
ABC) Data 1 OFF
05148 Phase rotation ACB (Rotation Power System OUT ON LED BO 70 129 1 GI
ACB) Data 1 OFF
06509 >Failure: Feeder VT (>FAIL:FEE- Measurement SP ON LED BI BO 74 9 1 GI

DER VT) Supervision OFF
06510 >Failure: Busbar VT (>FAIL: BUS Measurement SP ON LED BI BO 74 10 1 GI

VT) Supervision OFF
14101 Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD) OFF
14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD 1) OFF
6MD63 Manual 207

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 pik- RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO
ked up (RTD 1 St.1 p.up) OFF


(Fail: RTD 2) OFF



(Fail: RTD 3) OFF



(Fail: RTD 4) OFF



(Fail: RTD 5) OFF



(Fail: RTD 6) OFF



(Fail: RTD 7) OFF



(Fail: RTD 8) OFF
208 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Information List

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED


(Fail: RTD 9) OFF


14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD10) OFF
14202 RTD10 Temperature stage 1 pik- RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

ked up (RTD10 St.1 p.up) OFF


(Fail: RTD11) OFF



(Fail: RTD12) OFF


52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control Device CF_D12 on BO 240 160 1 GI

off
52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 160 1 GI

off
>Back Light on (>Light on) Device, General SP on * LED BI BO

Settings off
>Cabinet door open (>Door open) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 101 1 1 GI

off
>CB ready Spring is charged Process Data SP * LED BI BO CB

(>CB ready)
>CB waiting for Spring charged Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 101 2 1 GI

(>CB wait) off
>Door closed (>DoorClose) Process Data SP * LED BI BO CB
>Error Control Voltage (>ErrCn- Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 182 1 GI

trlV) off
6MD63 Manual 209

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
>Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 184 1 GI
off
>Error Motor Voltage (>Err Mot V) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 181 1 GI
off
>No Voltage (Fuse blown) (>No Process Data SP ON LED BI BO CB 160 38 1 GI

Volt.) OFF
>SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 183 1 GI

off
>Transformer Danger (>Tx Dan- Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 186 1 GI

ger) off
>Transformer Temperature (>Tx Process Data SP on LED BI BO CB 240 185 1 GI

Temp.) off
Breaker OPENED (Brk OPENED) Device, General IntSP * * LED BO

Settings
Clock Synchronization (Synch- Device, General IntSP_E

Clock) Settings v
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authoriza- DP ON LED 101 85 1 GI

tion OFF
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO- Control Authoriza- DP ON LED 101 86 1 GI

CAL) tion OFF
Controlmode REMOTE (Mode- Control Authoriza- IntSP ON LED

REMOTE) tion OFF
Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 161 1 GI

off
Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 161 1 GI

off
Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1) Device, General OUT on LED BO

Settings off
Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2) Device, General OUT on LED BO

Settings off
Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.) Protocol IntSP on LED BO

off
Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 175 1 GI

off
Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 175 1 GI

off
Feeder GROUNDED (Feeder Device, General IntSP * * LED BO

gnd) Settings
Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 164 1 GI

off
Ground Switch (GndSwit.) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 164 1 GI

off
210 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Information List

Informa-
tion

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
Hardware Test Mode (HWTest- Device, General IntSP ON LED BO
Mod) Settings OFF
Interlocking: 52 Close (52 Close) Control Device IntSP
Interlocking: 52 Open (52 Open) Control Device IntSP
Interlocking: Disconnect switch Control Device IntSP

Close (Disc.Close)
Interlocking: Disconnect switch Control Device IntSP

Open (Disc.Open)
Interlocking: Ground switch Close Control Device IntSP

(GndSw Cl.)
Interlocking: Ground switch Open Control Device IntSP

(GndSw Open)
Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 162 1 GI

off
Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 162 1 GI

off
Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D2 on BO 240 163 1 GI

off
Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on BI CB 240 163 1 GI

off
Stop data transmission Device, General IntSP ON LED BO 160 20 1 GI

(DataStop) Settings OFF
Test mode (Test mode) Device, General IntSP ON LED BO 160 21 1 GI

Settings OFF
Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Threshold-Switch IntSP on LED BI FK BO CB

off
Unlock data transmission via BI Control Device IntSP

(UnlockDT)
6MD63 Manual 211

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix
A.11 Measured Values
F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00601 Ia (Ia =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 1 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 1
00602 Ib (Ib =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 2 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 2
00603 Ic (Ic =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 3 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 3
00604 In (In =) Measurement 240 147 comp 3 1 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 4
00605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00621 Va (Va =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 4 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 5
00622 Vb (Vb =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 5 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 6
00623 Vc (Vc =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 6 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 7
00624 Va-b (Va-b=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 8 CFC CD DD
00625 Vb-c (Vb-c=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 9 CFC CD DD
00626 Vc-a (Vc-a=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 10 CFC CD DD
00627 VN (VN =) Measurement 240 147 comp 3 2 CFC CD DD
00629 V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00630 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00632 Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 240 148 comp 9 7 CFC CD DD
134 137 priv 9 11
00642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 12 CFC CD DD
00644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 13 CFC CD DD
00645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00831 3Io (zero sequence) (3Io =) Measurement CFC CD DD
00832 Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) Measurement CFC CD DD
212 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Measured Values

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00833 I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1 dmd=) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD
rement Setup
00834 Active Power Demand (P dmd =) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00835 Reactive Power Demand (Q dmd =) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00836 Apparent Power Demand (S dmd =) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00837 I A Demand Minimum (IAdmdMin) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00838 I A Demand Maximum (IAdmdMax) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00839 I B Demand Minimum (IBdmdMin) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00840 I B Demand Maximum (IBdmdMax) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00841 I C Demand Minimum (ICdmdMin) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00842 I C Demand Maximum (ICdmdMax) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00843 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

(I1dmdMin) rement Setup
00844 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

(I1dmdMax) rement Setup
00845 Active Power Demand Minimum (PdMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00846 Active Power Demand Maximum (PdMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00847 Reactive Power Minimum (QdMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00848 Reactive Power Maximum (QdMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00849 Apparent Power Minimum (SdMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00850 Apparent Power Maximum (SdMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00851 Ia Min (Ia Min=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00852 Ia Max (Ia Max=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00853 Ib Min (Ib Min=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00854 Ib Max (Ib Max=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00855 Ic Min (Ic Min=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
6MD63 Manual 213

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00856 Ic Max (Ic Max=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD
rement Setup
00857 I1 (positive sequence) Minimum (I1 Min=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00858 I1 (positive sequence) Maximum (I1 Max=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00859 Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00860 Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00861 Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00862 Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00863 Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00864 Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00865 Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00867 Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00868 Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00869 Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00870 Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00871 Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00872 V neutral Min (Vn Min =) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00873 V neutral Max (Vn Max =) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00874 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (V1 Min Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD
=) rement Setup
00875 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum (V1 Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

Max =) rement Setup
00876 Active Power Minimum (Pmin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00877 Active Power Maximum (Pmax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00878 Reactive Power Minimum (Qmin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00879 Reactive Power Maximum (Qmax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
214 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Measured Values

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00880 Apparent Power Minimum (Smin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD
rement Setup
00881 Apparent Power Maximum (Smax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00882 Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00883 Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00884 Power Factor Maximum (PF Max=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00885 Power Factor Minimum (PF Min=) Min/Max Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy CD DD
00889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy CD DD
00901 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement 134 137 priv 9 14 CFC CD DD
00924 Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy CD DD
00925 Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy CD DD
00928 Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy CD DD
00929 Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy CD DD
00963 I A demand (Ia dmd=) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00964 I B demand (Ib dmd=) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00965 I C demand (Ic dmd=) Demand Measu- CFC CD DD

rement Setup
00991 Pressure (Press =) Measurement CD DD
00992 Temperature (Temp =) Measurement CD DD
00996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measurement 134 136 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD
00997 Transducer 2 (Td2=) Measurement 134 136 priv 9 2 CFC CD DD
01068 Temperature of RTD 1 ( RTD 1 =) Measurement 134 146 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD
01077 Temperature of RTD10 ( RTD10 =) Measurement 134 146 priv 9 10 CFC CD DD
6MD63 Manual 215

C53000-G1840-C1013
Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
30701 P, L1 (active power, phase L1) (P, L1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
30704 Q, L1 (reactive power, phase L1) (Q, L1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
30707 Power Factor, phase L1 (PF, L1 =) Measurement CFC CD DD
37-1 under current (37-1) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
I A dmd> (I Admd>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
I B dmd> (I Bdmd>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
I C dmd> (I Cdmd>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
I1dmd> (I1dmd>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Statistics CD DD
Operating hours greater than (OpHour>) CD DD
Pressure< (Press<) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
Temp> (Temp>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
170.20 V1 = (V1 =) CD DD
50
170.20 V1 = (V1 =) CD DD
50
|Pdmd|> (|Pdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
|Power Factor|< (|PF|<) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
|Qdmd|> (|Qdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
|Sdmd|> (|Sdmd|>) Set Points (Mea- CFC CD DD

sured Values)
216 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Index
Index
A Control voltage of BI 1 to BI 7 74
Control voltage of BI 21 to BI 24 78
Accessories 136 Covering Caps 136
Acknowledgement of Cubicle Installation 139
commands to local/remote/Digsi 47 Current Inputs 104
commands to the device front 47 Current Rotation 22
Analog Inputs 2, 104 Current Symmetry 21
Analog Outputs 104 Currents 68
Auxiliary Voltages 19
Average Calculation 54
D
B Danger (definition) ii
DCF77 122
Battery 137 Default Settings 179
BCPU 74 Detached Operation Unit 157
BI/O2 80 Detached Operator Panel 127
Binary Inputs 3 Device Position 46
Binary Inputs and Outputs 3, 68 DIGRA 137
Binary Outputs 3 DIGSI REMOTE 4 138
Blocked by Protection 46 Dimensions 123
Breaker Control 8, 37, 115 Direction check with load current 98
Buffer Battery 19 Disassembly of the Device 70
Display Editor 137
DNP3.0 6, 109
Double Operation 46
C
Caution (definition) ii
CFC 116
E
Check
Current and voltage connection 97 Electrical Tests 110
Rotation 98 Elementary Diagrams 139
Checking Connections 87 EMC Tests for Immunity 110
Checking System Connections 90 EMC Tests For Noise Emission 111
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs 95 Exchanging interface modules 82
Climatic Stress Tests 112 External Current Transformer Circuits 21
Clock 109, 122
Command Output and Switching Relays 48
Command Sequence 38
Commissioning 92 F
Commissioning Aids 53
Fault value recording 53
Communications Interfaces 107
Femal Plugs 137
Connection Examples 171
Fibre optic cable 89
Connections 68, 87
Final Preparation of the Device 102
Construction 114
Front Elements 3
Contact type for output relays 69
Functional Scope 14
Control Functions 5
Control voltage 74
6MD63 Manual 217

C53000-G1840-C1013
Index
G Microcomputer System 3
Min/Max Report 120
Graphic Tools 138 Minimum and Maximum Values 54
Graphical symbols iii MODBUS 6
Ground Impedance Ratios 18 Monitoring Functions 8, 19
Group alarms 26 Monitoring of feedback information 47
Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks 137
H
N
Hardware Modifications 68
Hardware Monitoring 19 Negative Sequence Current Protection 8
Housing Nominal Frequency 15
for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Nominal rated values 18
(Size 1/1 x 19) 124 Note (definition) ii
for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/1) 126 Numerical Values 12
for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19") 125
for Panel Surface Mounting (Size 1/3 x 19) 125
O
I Operating Hours Counter 122
Operating Software 137
Information List 203 Overview of the masking features 198
Installation 62
Insulation Tests 110
Interface Cable 137
Interface Modules 82 P
Interface modules 136
Panel Flush Mounting 139
Interlocking 40
Panel Installation 123
Interoperability List 187
Panel Surface Mounting 65, 146
IRIG B 122
Parameter names iii
Parameter options iii
PC Front Interface 107
L PC Operating Interface at Front 87
Phase Rotation 15, 36, 98
Limit Values 54 Pickup voltages of BI1 to BI7 75, 77
Load 98 Pickup voltages of BI21 to BI24 79
Long-Term Mean Value 120 Pickup voltages of BI8 to BI20 81
Polarity of Current Transformers 15
Power Supply 4, 104
Power System Data 1 14
M
Power System Data 2 18
Measured Values 119 Pre-Defined CFC Charts 183
Measured Values Monitoring 19 Probing 20
Measured Values Supervision 121 PROFIBUS 108
Measurements 50 ProfibusInterface 85
Measuring Transducer Inputs 104 Protective Functions 5
Mechanical Stress Tests 112 Protocol 189
Memory Components 19 Protocol-dependent functions 189
Message Processing 49
218 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Index
Q Temperature unit 15
Temperaturerfassung 27
Qualified personnel (definition) iii Termination 84
Text Values 12
Thermobox 27, 89
Time Stamping 121
R
Time synchronization interface 4, 88
Rack mounting and cubicle mounting 64 Trip Circuit Monitor 122
Rear Service/Modem Interface 107 Typographic conventions iii
Reassembly of Device 86
Recording of Event and Fault Data 5
Reference Voltages 19
U
Regionalization 10
RS232 107 UL-listing 106, 114
RS485 107
RTD 27
V
S Vibration and Shock Stress 112
Voltage Inputs 104
SCADA Interface 107 Voltage Rotation 22
Serial Interfaces 3, 69 Voltage Symmetry 21
Service Conditions 113 Voltage transformer m.c.b. 136
Set points 52 VTs Nominal Values 15
Short Circuit Links 136 VTs Ratios 16
SIMATIC CFC 4 138
Software Monitoring 20
Statistics 121
Switching Authority 44 W
Switching Mode 45, 46
Warning (definition) ii
Symbol conventions iii
Watchdog 20
System (SCADA) Interface 87 Waveform Capture 55, 121
T Z
Temperature Detection 115
Zone Controlled/ Field Interlocking 46
Temperature meter 89
6MD63 Manual 219

C53000-G1840-C1013
Index
220 6MD63 Manual

C53000-G1840-C1013
Corrections
To From
Siemens AG Name:
Dept. PTD PA D DM
D13623 Berlin Company/Dept.:
Germany
Address:
Dear reader,
printing errors can never be entirely eliminated:
therefore, should you come across any when read- Phone no.: Fax no.:
ing this manual, kindly enter them in this form to-
gether with any comments or suggestions for im-
provement that you may have.
Corrections/Suggestions
6MD63 Manual
C53000-G1840-C101-3
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use
or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden with-
out express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of
Subject to technical alteration a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order-no.: C53000-G1840-C101-3

Available from: LZF Frth-Bislohe
Printed in Germany/Imprim en Allemagne
AG 0302 0.10 FO 232 Am

6MD63 Us

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

6MD63 Us

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Preface

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1840-C1013

This product is ULcertified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:

IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ.

Earth fault device-internal logical input signal

Earth fault device-internal logical output signal

UL1L2 internal input signal of an analogue quantity

1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the

6MD63 Manual iii

Input signal of an analogue quantity

& AND gate

ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one

Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are

Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered)

Formation of one analogue output signal from

T Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

S Q Static memory (RSflipflop) with setting input (S),

1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2

1.2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 5

2.2 Monitoring Functions ............................................................................................................ 19

2.3 Temperature Detection via RTD-boxes ................................................................................ 27

2.5 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................... 37

2.6 Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................... 49

3 Installation and Commissioning ...................................................................................................... 61

3.1 Installation and Connections ................................................................................................ 62

3.2 Checking Connections.......................................................................................................... 87

3.4 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 102

4 Technical Data ................................................................................................................................. 103

4.1 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 104

4.2 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 115

4.3 RTD-Boxes for Temperature Detection ............................................................................. 115

4.4 User Defined Functions with CFC ...................................................................................... 116

4.5 Additional Functions ........................................................................................................... 119

4.6 Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 123

A Appendix .......................................................................................................................................... 131

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories ............................................................................... 132

6MD63 Manual vii

A.3 Connection Examples......................................................................................................... 171

A.4 Default Settings .................................................................................................................. 179

A.5 Interoperability List ............................................................................................................. 187

A.6 Protocol-dependent functions............................................................................................. 189

A.7 Functions Overview ............................................................................................................ 190

A.8 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 190

A.10 Information List ................................................................................................................... 203

A.11 Measured Values ............................................................................................................... 212

Index ........................................................................................................................................... 217

6MD63 Manual viii

1.1 Overall Operation 1-2

1.1 Overall Operation

Time DCF 77/

possible. The operating program DIGSI 4 is required which facilitates a comfortable

Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.

RTD-Boxes Detection of any ambient temperatures or coolant temperatures by means of RTD-

Table 2-1 Regionalization

Function Region DE Region Worldwide Region US

Figure 2-1 Navigating Using DIGSI 4 Example

Figure 2-2 Power System Data Dialog Box in DIGSI 4 Example

To switch between primary values and secondary values:

Figure 2-3 Selection of Primary or Secondary Value Entry Example

2.1.1 Configuration of Functions

Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments

2.1.2 Power System Data 1

2.1.2.1 Power System